新课标必修1 unit 3 语言知识讲义(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
【简介】感谢网友“听风听雨”参与投稿，下面是小编帮大家整理的新课标必修1 unit 3 语言知识讲义(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)（共20篇），欢迎阅读，希望大家能够喜欢。
篇1：新课标必修1 unit 1 语言知识讲义(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Unit 1 Friendship
Part one useful words
1. add
1) 增加，附加
2) 加，加起来
3) 补充说，又说
【典型例句】
1） Add more hot water , please.
2） If you add 4 to 3 you get 7
3） I should like to add that we are pleased with the test result.
4） These numbers add up to 100.
【类比延伸】
1）n. addition 增加，附加物
2) n. adder 加法器
【拓展】
1) add to = increase
2) add … to.. 把。。。加到。。
3) add up 加起来
4) add up to 总计达， 加起来总和是。。。
例如：
The bad weather only add to our difficult.
He wrote down the weight of each stone and then added up all the weights.
【过关练习】
1) there have been several new events _______ to the program for the Beijing Olympic Games. ( 北京)
A. add B. too add
C. adding D. added
2) The heavy snow _____ our difficulty with the project.
A. added up to B. added
C. added up D. added to
3) Please ______ the numbers and I’m sure they will ______ more than 1000.
A. add up ; add B. add up ; add up
C. add up; add up to D. add; add up
2. ignore
1）不理睬，忽视；
2） ＝take notice of 强调装不知道或没有看到
【典型例句】
1） I tried to tell her but she ignored me.
2） Ignore the child if he misbehaves, and he’ll soon stop.
【拓展】
1） adj. ignorant （常和of, in 连用） 无知识的， 不知道的。 强调“不懂，不知”
He is ignorant of Latin
2) n. ignorance 无知愚昧
ignorance of the law is no excuse 不懂法律不能成为借口
【过关练习】
1） ― My children are always arguing.
--- ____________.
A. Just ignore them B. That’s right
C. Are you sure D. How old is the boy
* 用ignore的适当形式填空
2）He ________ the doctor’s advice and goes on smoking.
3) I was ______ that the boss could be so strict.
4) his failure resulted from his ______________.
3．cheat
1). V (常和into , of 连用)骗取，欺诈，作弊；逃脱，免于
2) 骗子（尤其是游戏或比赛中的）作弊者； 欺骗手段
【典型例句】
1） George cheated me but I’ll get even with him one day!
2） He always cheats at chards ; I never play with him.
3） He didn’t play the game fairly --- he cheated.
4） The swimmers cheated death in spite of the storm.
【拓展】
cheat sb. . of sth.
demand sb. . of sth.
cure sb. . of sth.
rob sb. . of sth.
fool sb. . of sth.
inform sb. . of sth.
warn sb. of sth.
accuse sb. of sth.
【过关练习】
1) Any who is caught ___ shall not pass the exam.
A. to cheat B. cheating
C. to be cheating D. cheated
2) All her money was ____ on her way home
A. cheated B. robbed C. stolen D. lose
* 完成句子
3） 这家银行昨晚被抢劫了很多现金。
The bank _______ _______ ________ a lot pof money last night.
4) 这个贼从这家商店偷了很多昂贵的画。
The thief ______ many expensive pictures ______ the shop.
5.) 他因拒捕而受到控告。
He was ______ ______ resisting arrest.
6) 请通知学生们演讲的日前。
Please _______ the students ______ the date of speech.
7)医生们成功地救治了他的非典疾病。
The doctors _______ him ______ his SARS successfully.
4. reason
1) n.原因， 理由， 动机
2）n. 理智，道理。判断力
【典型例句】
1) The reason why she was ill was that she had eaten bad meat.
2) The reason for this is that this plane is also a bicycle.
3) There are reasons for this great interest in the ideas, feelings, and action of youth.
对年轻人的思想情感和行动发生这样巨大的兴趣，自有它的道理。
3） There’s a great deal of reason in his advice.
【过关练习】
1） The reason _____ he was late was _____ his car had broken down on the way.
A. why; because B. that; because
C. that; for D. why; that
2) This is the very reason _____ he explained to me just now.
A. why B. that C. for which D. of
3) He didn’t turn up at the party ______ some reason.
A. for B. because C. because of D. on
4) His failure was ______ his laziness.
A. because B. because of C. as a result D. the reason for
【拓展】
adj. reasonable ①合理的 ； 通情达理的；
You must really be reasonable, and prepared to cooperate.
② 适当的；不高的（价钱）
Ten pounds for a good dictionary seems reasonable enough.
【类比延伸】
1） reason 决定做一件事或采取某种行动的理由； 解释或原谅某个行为的理由。
2） cause 产生某事结果的起因，动机，理由
3） excuse 托词，借口； 指为某行为而作的解释，可能是真的，也可是藉口
【过关练习】
用reason, cause, excuse, reasonable填空
5) what he said at the meeting was very _______ and nobody was against him
6) You shouldn’t find any ____ for your laziness.
7) Who knows the ___ for his being late?
8) The police had found out the ______ of the big fire in the centre of the city.
5. share
1） n. (属于或由某人做的)部分， 一份， 股份，股票
2）v. （常与in连用） 共用， 分摊，共有
【典型例句】
1) We gave each of the five children an equal share.
2) they sell share in companies at the stock exchange.
3) they shared the sweets
4) they share their joys and sorrows
【拓展】
1) share sth. with sb. 与某人共用某物
2) bear / take one’s share of 负担。。。的部分
【过关联系】
1） Let Harry play with your toys as well, Clare, you must learn to ______ (全国)
A. support B. care C. spare D. share
2) It rained heavily. And it was very kind of him to ____ his umbrella with me.
A. use B. share C. take D. bring
Part Two Phrase
1. be concerned about
对。。。关心，挂念， 关注某事
【典型例句】
1) The government should be concerned about unemployment.
2) we are rather concerned about father’s health.
【拓展】
concern oneself with /in … 从事/参与某事
concern oneself about / for… 担忧/关心。。。
as far as….. be concerned 就。。。而言
as concerns 关于
feel/ show concern about /for… 担心、关心、挂念。。。
one’s concern 某人关心的事
be concerned with 与。。。有关
concerned adj. 有关的， 担心的
concernedly adv. 担忧的
concerning prep. 有关， 关于
【过关练习】
1） __________ that he was no qualifications in business management , Ken plans to grasp the necessary skills by taking a part time course.
A. Concerning B. Concerned
C. Being concerned D. to concern
2) ____________ English is concerned , he is first in our class.
A. As B. As soon as C. As far as D. Now that
2． go through
1） 经历，经受 2) 磨穿某物 3）仔细检查 4）顺利完成
【典型例句】
He is considering all that he has gone through.
They went through our luggage at the customs.
How long will it take you to go through the book?
【拓展】
go about ＝ set out to do sth. 着手干某事
go against 反对， 违背
go by 经过
go over 检查
go on with sth, 继续
go on to do sth.
go on doing sth.
go without sth. 没有某事也行
go wrong 出毛病
go away / out 出去，离开
go after sb./ sth. 追求某人
go mad
go ahead.
go in for.. 参加（考试或比赛）；
【过关练习】
1） It’s ten years since the scientist _______ his life’s work of discovering the valuable chemical.
A. set out B. took off C. turned up D. went about
2) The early pioneers had to ______ many difficulties to settle on the new land.
A. go back on B. go through
C. go into D. go along with
3) I can’t ______ the letter in an hour
A. pass through B. go through C. take through D. come across
4) You have no idea what I’ve had to ______ during the last few months.
A. come through B. go through C. cut through D. look through
5) I don’t ______ rock’ “ n” roll. It’s much too noisy for my tastes. ( 北京)
A．go after B. go away with C. go into D. go in for
3． join in
参加某项（正在进行的）活动， 尤其指娱乐性活动，常代替take part in,
【典型例句】
They came out for their morning exercises, I also joined in
why didn’t Jim join in the conversation?
【类比延伸】
1） attend是正式用语，指参加会议或仪式、婚礼、典礼，听报告等
2） join指加入某个组织、团体，成为其成员之一。如 参军、入团、入党等
3） join in表示“参加正在进行的活动”， 如游戏、讨论、散步
4） take part in 指参加群众性的活动或会议，强调参加者的积极态度，并在活动中起作用
【过关练习】
1） Will you _____ us in the discussion about the students burden of studies?
A. attend B. join in C. take part in D. join
2) When did you ______ the physical training team?
A. join B. take part C. attend D. join in
3) A student began to sing a song , and soon someone else __________.
A. joined B. joined in C. took part in D. took
4) Did John _____ the general cleaning yesterday afternoon?
A. join B. attend C. take D. take part in
part three “ structure
1. while walking the dog , you were careless and got loose and was hit by a car.
【句型概括】
while walking the dog作状语，相当于while you were walking the dog
【拓展】
状语从句的省略：
when, while , as , if , though, where, unless等连词引导状语从句中， 如果谓语动词有be， 而主语又跟主句的主语相同或成为it时， 则从句的主语和be常常省略。
【经典例句】
When (I was) in Japan, I took many beautiful pictures.
while ( I was) waiting, I read newspaper.
He looks as if ( he were) drunk.
【过关练习】
1.) When ____ help, one often says “thank you” or “ It’s kind of you”. (福建)
A. offering B. to offer C. to be offered D. offered
2.)_________ with the size of the whole earth, the biggest ocean does not seem big at all.
(湖北)
A. Compare B. When comparing C. Comparing D. When compared
3.) while watching television , __________ (全国2)
A. the doorbell rang B. the doorbell rings
C. we heard the doorbell ring D. we heard the doorbell rings
4.) when ______ different cultures , we often pay attention only to the differences without noticing the many similarities. ( 20浙江)
A Compared B. being compared
C. comparing D. having compared
2. … but your friend can’t go until he / she finishes cleaning the bicycle.
【句型概况】
not …. until… 结构。 until/ till在肯定句中表示动作的终点，在否定句中则表示动作的起点。until/ till与肯定的主句连用时，主句的谓语动词必须是持续动词，与否定的主句连用时，主句的谓语动词则为瞬间动词。
【典型例句】
I didn’t wake up until I heard the alarm clock.
Wait until the rain stops
【类比延伸】
1） not until 放在句首时必须用部分倒装语序
2） until/till时间状语从句中用一般现在时代替一般将来时，用现在完成时代替将来完成时。
【过关练习】
1．Simon thought his computer was broken _____ his little brother pointed out that he had forgotten to turn it on .( 2005北京春季)
A. until B. unless C. after D. because
2. We were told that we should follow the main road ________ we reached the central railway station. ( 2004辽宁)
A whenever B. until C. while D. wherever
3.She and her family hid away for two years before they were discovered.
【句型概况】
before 引导时间状语从句。 before con. 用以表示从句动作发生之前的时间,，译法灵活。
注意以下句型:
it will be +时间段＋before……. 得过多久才。。。。
It won’t be +时间段＋before…. 用不了多久就。。。
It was时间段＋before…. 过了多久之后才。。。
It wasn’t long before…… 没过多久就。。。
【类比延伸】
1） It will be+ 时间段＋before 从句 （从句用一般现在时表将来） 要过多久才。。。
2）It is / has been + 时间段＋since从句 （从句常用一般过去时，动词是非延续性动词
3) It is + 时间状语＋ that….. 强调句
4）It was +时刻+when从句 当。。。时，是。。。时间了。
【过关练习】
1. – Did Jack come back early last night?
-- Yes. It was not yet eight o’clock _______ he arrived home.
A. before B. when C. that D. until
2. – Why didn’t you tell him about the meeting?
-- He rushed out of the room ______i could say a word . ( 四川)
A. before B. until C. when D. after
3. The American civil war lasted four years _________ the North won in the end. (2005广东)
A. After B. before C. when D. then
篇2：新课标必修1 unit 3 语言知识讲义(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Part One : word
1. finally
【用法指南】
1) adv.终于，最终
2) adv.（用于列举）最后
3) adv.彻底地，决定性地
【典型例句】
I finally managed to get her attention
我终于设法引起了他的注意
And finally, I would like to thank you all for coming here.
最后，我感谢大家的光临
The matter was not finally settled until much later.
这事很久以后才彻底解决。
【拓展】
final adj. 最后的，最终的，决定性的
【类比延伸】
1) finally 强调活动过程地终结，译作“最后”； 在列举事物或论点时，可用来引出最后一项内容；用在句中动词地前面，表示“等了好久才。。。” 如：she finally agreed with me.
2) at last 强调耽误很久之后才。。。； 感情色彩浓重，如不耐烦，不放心，不如愿等。如：At last firemen have put out a big forest in California.
3) in the end 表示经过许多变化、困难或捉摸不定地情况之后才发生。相当于at last 和finally。但 finally 一般位于谓语前，其他二个既可以用在谓语前，也可位于谓语后。注意： at the end 表示最后，可用于预卜未来。如：
In the end, we stay at home and look after everything.
【过关练习1】
1) Four policemen rode past on their motorbikes, then came the television broadcasting car, and ______ the marathon runners.
A. at the last B. in the end C. finally D. to the final
2) He stopped at the gate and took a(n) _____ look at his familiar schoolyard as if to impress it deeply on his mind.
A. last B. final C. ending D. over
3) _____ the finals, Hungary beat Spain ____ 120.
A. At; at B. By; at C. With; by D. At; by
4) He went into the class, found a seat at the _____ of the classroom and sat down.
A. final B. back C. behind D. last
5) We won the ____ victory against the Japanese invaders in 1945.
A. last B. final C. latest D. late
2. persuade
【用法指南】
1) vt. 劝说；说服
2) vt. 使信服，使相信
【典型例句】
He persuaded her to go to school, even though she did not want to.
They persuaded us into / out of going to the party.
他们劝说我们去/不去参加聚会
She was not persuaded of the truth of his statement.
她没有被说服相信他的话是真的。
How can I persuade you that I am sincere?
怎样才能使你相信我是真信实意的呢？
【拓展】
1） persuade sb. into/ out of (doing) sth. 说服或劝说某人（不）要做某事
2） persuade sb. that clause 使某人相信某事；使某人信服
3） persuade sb of sth. 使某人相信某事物；使某人信服
【类比延伸】
1) persuade ; advise
persuade 表示用理由，建议或个人说服力来战胜某人； persuade强调“劝说”已收到成效。 而advise并不涉及是否有效，甚至很可能说而不服
2） persuade; convince
根据一条习惯规则， 一个人persuade（说服）某人做某事； 而convince (使确信)某人相信一句话或一个提议地正确性。
【过关练习2】
1） －He still smokes a lot , do you know?
－ Yes . But I don’t know how I can ______ him to give it up.
A. advise B. try to persuade C. persuade D. suggest
2) While shopping , people sometimes can’t help ____ into buying something they don’t really need.
A. to persuade B. persuading
C. being persuaded D. be persuaded
3) Alice trusts you; Only you can ___ her to give up the foolish idea.
A. suggest B. attract C. tempt D. persuade
4) I had ____ him not to stay up late, but he still didn’t go to bed until midnight.
A. persuaded B. advised C. promised D. suggested
5) – Have you ___ your brother to give up smoking ?
-- No. I talked to him yesterday but he would have none of my advice.
A. persuaded B. advised C. promised D. suggested
3. insist
【用法指南】
v． 主张；坚持，坚持主张，常与 on连用，或后接that从句
【典型例句】
I insisted that he was wrong
I insist on your being there.
我坚持要你在那里
We all insist that we not rest until we finish the work.
大家都坚持要求不完工就不休息。
【拓展】
1） insist表示“坚持要求”时，其后地宾语从句采用虚拟语气； 表示“坚持认为，坚持说”时， 其后地宾语从句采用陈述语气。
I insisted he go to see a doctor, but he insisted nothing was wrong with him.
I insisted that a doctor be sent for immediately.
2) 在ask, suggest, order, demand, propose, insist, request, advise , desire, require, prefer等后面的宾语从句采用虚拟语气结构。
【过关练习3】
1） We insist that a meeting _____ as soon as possible.
A. be held B. will held C. is held D. would hold
2) I insisted that a doctor ______ immediately.
A. has been sent for B. sends for
C. will be sent for D. be sent for
3) The lady insisted that the young man ____ her wallet and insisted on ____ to the police station at once.
A. had stolen; be sent B. should steal ; sending him
C. had stolen; his being sent D. should steal; sending
4. determine
1) vt. 查明，测定
2）vt. 决定，影响
3）vt. 确定，安排
【典型例句】
We set out to determine exactly what happened that night.
我们着手调查那天晚上发生的事情
Age and experience will be determining factors in our choice of candidate.
年龄和经验是我们选择候选人的决定性因素。
A date for the meeting has yet not be determined.
会议日前尚待确定
【拓展】
下定决心干某事:
determine to do sth,
be determined to do sth,
decide to do sth.
make up one’s mind to do sth
make a decision to do sth
【类比延伸】
determine to do 和be determined to do 都表示“决定干某事”， 前者强调动作， 后者表示状态。determine是瞬间动词，不能和时间段连用；而be determined 表示一种状态，可与时间段连用。
如：he was determined to do it for a long time.
【过关练习4】
1） She is a/an _____ woman who always gets what she wants.
A. experienced B. absent – minded
C. determined D. easy- going
2) we are determined ____ the task finished before the end of this month.
A. to get B. get C. getting D. to have get
3) ______ to give up smoking , he threw away his ____ cigarettes.
A. Determined; remained B. . Determined; remaining
C. Determining; remained D. Determining; remaining
4) I left him , ______ never to come back again.
A. being determined B. was determined
C. determining D. determined
Part Two : phrase
1. change one’s mind
【用法指南】
动词词组, 意为“改变注意”
【典型例句】
Tom has changed his mind
Once you have made a decision, you had better not change your mind.
【拓展】
1) turn one’s mind/ thoughts/ attention 把自己的心智、思想、注意力贯注在某事上
2) make up one’s mind 决定， 下定决心
3) keep sth. in mind 记住
4) read one’s mind 看透某人的心思
5) lose one’s mind 发疯
6) out of one’s mind 不理智，发疯
7) keep one’s mind on sth. 把注意力放在。。。
8) come into one’s mind 突然想到
9) speak one’s mind 直言不讳
10) fix one’s mind upon 专心于，专注于
【过关练习1】
1） No matter what you do, you should put your ____ into it.
A. mind B. heart C. brain D. thought
2) Once he has _____, nothing can change his mind.
A. made up his mind B. decided his mind
C. determined his mind D. made his mind
3) He offered me just what I dreamed about as if he has been able to ______ my mind.
A. read B. have C. make up D. change
2. give in
【用法指南】
1) vt. 让步； 投降，屈服
2) vt. 提交， 呈送
【典型例句】
The boys fought until one gave in.
Don’t give in to him
She gave in her report
【拓展】
1） give away 赠送， 给予； 揭发， 泄漏
2） give back 归还
3） give off 放出；散发出（液体、气体、气味、热能、光、声音）
4） give out 分发； 用完，消耗
5） give up 放弃
【典型例句】
He tried to pretend that he wasn’t worried , but his shaking hands gave him away.
他使尽装作不担心的样子，但他抖动的双手暴露了真情
Gave my book back to me.
The cooker is giving off a funny smell.
锅里冒出一阵怪味
After a month their food supplies gave out.
过了一个月，他们食物已消耗殆尽。
She doesn’t give up easily.
她做任何事都不轻易放弃。
【过关练习2】
1) Although Jane agrees with me on most points, here was one on which she was unwilling to______.
A. give up B. give in C. give away D. give off
2) – Smoking is bad for your health.
-- Yes, I know. But I simple can’t ______.
A. give it up B. give it in
C. give it out D. give it away
3) What shall we use for power when all the oil in the world has______?
A. given out B. put out C. held up D. used up
Part three: Structure
1. It was my sister who first had the idea to cycle along the Mekong River from where it begins to where it ends.
【句型概况】
1） 被强调部分若为指人的名词或代词，用that或who（强调宾语，可用whom）; 被强调部分若为指物的名词或代词，用that。 强调句型应避免使用when, where ,which等连词
2） that / who后的动词的人称和数的变化要与前面的名词或代词一致。
3） be在句型中总是单数形式
4） be在句型不能用来强调谓语动词。
5） 感叹句的强调句型，如：
How serious it is that he looks!
6） 强调句型的疑问形式
How many people is it that are being trained for the special work.
Was it in the street that you met him.
7) 强调句型中的特殊形式
It is not until……
It is because … that….
【过关练习1】
1） It is what you rather than what you say _____ matters (2005天津)
A. that B. what C. which D. this
2） It was only with the help of the local guide ____.
A. was the mountain climber rescued
B. that the mountain climber was rescued
C. when the mountain climber was rescued
D. then the mountain climber was rescued
3) Why ! I have nothing to confess. _____ you want me to say?
A. What is it that B. What it is that
C. How is it that D. How it is that
2. Once she has made up her mind , nothing can change it.
【句型概况】
once此处为连词， 意为“一旦”， 引导条件状语从句
【典型例句】
Once printed, this dictionary will be very popular .
【拓展】once还可用作名词， 意为“一次’; 还可用作副词，意为”一旦，曾经；从前，完全”. 常用搭配：
all at once 突然， 同时
at once 立刻，马上
every once in a while 偶然
for this once 就这一次，破例一回
more than once 不至一次
not once 一次也不
once again再次
once and again 一再，再三
once for all 一劳永逸；永久地，彻底地
once in a while 有时，间或，偶尔
【过关练习2】
1) _____ you have made a promise, you should carry it out
A. Once B. Until C. For D. While
2) The research is so designed that once ____ nothing canbe done to change it.
A. begins B. having begun
C. beginning D. begun
3) ______ you begin, you must continue.
A. Once B. until C. For D. As soon as
篇3：新课标必修1 unit 4 语言知识讲义(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Unit 4 Earthquakes
Part One : word
1. shake
【用法指南】
1) vt. 摇动，使摇动 2) vi （ 指人、嗓音）发抖，打颤
3） vt.使人心绪不宁
【典型例句】
The teacher shook the boy by the shoulders
the poor boy was shaking with cold
The house shook as the heavy truck went past
His lying shook my faith in him.
【拓展】
shake with… 因。。。而颤抖
shake hands with sb. 与某人握手
shake sb. by the hand ＝shake one’s hand
shake one’s head 摇头表示不同意
nod one’s head 点头表示同意
【过关练习1】
1)The frightened boy said to his mother in a ___ voice.
A. trembled B. shaken
C. trembling D. shook
2) He is shaking hands ____ my father.
A. to B. of C. with D. at
2．rise
【用法指南】
1）vi. (太阳，月亮等)升起；升高；上升；上涨；起床
2）n. 升起；升高
3) rise to one’s feet 站起来
4）give rise to 引起， 导致
5) give sb. a rise给某人涨工资
【典型例句】
The sun rises in the east and sets in the west .
The river is rising after the train.
Prices have risen steadily during the past decade
The rise in the house rent has added to our difficulties.
【类比延伸】
1） rise 为不及物动词，作“上升”时指继续上升，常用于日，月，云，烟、物价、温度、河水、潮水及人的职位等。
raise 为及物动词，意为“举起、提出、饲养、种植”；用作“举起”时，有使物体达到应有的高度的含义。
【过关练习2】
1) They ____ their glasses _____ the friendship between the two nations.
A. look; for B. raised; to C. raised; for D. life; to
用rise和raise的正确形式填空
2) He’s used to _____ early in the morning
3) His funny story ____ a lot of laughter.
4) Prices _____ surprisingly since last year.
5) The level of the water in the river ____ after the heavy rain.
3． smelly]
【用法指南】
1）adj. 发臭的，难闻的
2） smelly 是一个派生词 即smell (n) +y(后缀)。类似的如：
blood--- bloody cloud--- cloudy
rain----- rainy wind---- windy
greed--- greedy sun ---sunny
fog --- foggy fat--- fatty mud--- muddy
【过关练习3】
用所给单词的正确形式填空
1)．He had a ____( blood )nose.
2.) Today is a ____ (wind) day.
3. )He looked at the cake with ____ (greed )eyes
4) ____ (fog) weather is common here.
5) The roads are _____ (mud)
6) This is a _____ (sun) room.
4. ruin
【用法指南】
1） vt. 毁坏，毁灭，使毁坏
2） n. 毁灭，破产
3） in ruins 成为废墟； 遭到严重破坏
【典型例句】
An earthquake left the whole town in ruins.
She poured water all over my painting , and ruined it.
This island has been ruined by tourism
I was ruined by that law case
【类比延伸】
1） ruin 一次性、彻底的毁坏（ 不含有某种摧毁性的力量进行破坏的意思）； 通常暗指无可挽回的伤害，但不一定指完全毁灭（含有在一定的过程种逐渐毁掉的意思）。此外，ruin多用于借喻中，泛指一般的“坏了”
2） harm指对人或物的伤害或损坏，身体或心理上的伤害。
3） destroy强调以具有摧毁或杀伤性的力量把某物彻底毁掉； 有时用于比喻，意为“打破（希望， 计划）， 使失败
4） damage损失，损坏； 多用于无生命的东西，指“价值、用途降低或外表损坏等，不一定全部破坏，损坏了还可以修复； 这种是自然灾害或人为过失造成的。
【过关练习4】
1). Mike didn’t play football yesterday because he had ____ his leg.
A. damaged B. hurt C. hit D. struck
2) the building is _____.
A. under ruin B. in ruins C. under ruins D. in ruin
用ruin, damage , harm, destroy的正确形式填空
3)．Getting up early won’t ___ you.
4.) The fire ____ most of the building
5. )The crops are all ___ by the continuous rain
6) A falling tree ____ the roof and we should repair it.
5． shock
【用法指南】
1）vt. 使。。。震惊； 使。。。激怒
2） n. 震动，震惊，电击
【典型例句】
I was shocked when I heard about your accident
My father was shocked
The shock of the explosion was felt far away.
the two t rains met and the shock broke the windows
it was a great shock for him when his wife died.
An electric shock can kill you
【拓展】
1) in shock
2) get a shock from a wire
【过关练习5】
1) All of the people present felt _____ at the _____ news.
A. shocked; shocking B. shocking; shocked
C. shocking; shocking D. shocked ; shocked
2) Hw was shocked _____ his son playing all day.
A. knowing B. to know C. at know D. known.
用shock的正确形式填空
3) I felt the ______ as the aircraft hit the ground.
4) He was _____ to hear his child swearing.
5). The news of his mother’s death was a terrible ____ to him.
6. rescue
【用法指南】
1）n. 营救，救出
2）v. 营救，救出（常与 from连用）
【典型例句】
We rescued the boy who fell into the river.
However , rescue operations are proving difficult
【拓展】
1） rescuer n, 援救者，营救者
2） come to someone’s rescue 来/去援救某人
【过关练习6】
完成句子
1)． The soldier ____ a boy ____ drowning
这个战士把溺水的男孩救了起来。
2) Researchers ______ in the mountains
搜救者救出了在山中迷失的人们
3) The ______ in a week.
营救队一星期内进行了10次援救
4. ) They must come _____ our rescue.
A. to B. at C. of D. from.
7． honour
【用法指南】
1）n. 荣誉，名誉； 使人感倒光荣的人、事
2）vt. 尊敬； 给予荣誉
【典型例句】
It’s a great honour to have the President to visit our town.
They stood in silence as a mark of honour to her
She is an honour to her family.
Today the President is hounourin us with his presence.
I feel highly honoured by your trust
【拓展】
1） in honour of = show respect to…
2） show honour to sb.
3） a sense of honour to sb.
4） do honour to
5） on /Upon one’s honour
【过关练习7】
1. )It is _____ honour to her you speak so highly of me.
A. / B. at C. the D. a
2.) All of the village came out to receive me an ____ guest.
A. honour B. honouring C. honoured D. honours
3) I feel highly _____ the kind things you say about me.
A. honoured for B. honour for C. honoured by D. honour by
4) My sister was against my suggestion while my brother was _____ it .
A. in favour of B. in memory of
C. in honour of D. in search of
Part two Phrase
1 a (great) number of
1)许多，大量的
2）后接可数名词复数
3）谓语动词用复数
【典型例句】
I have read a great number of books on this subject.
A great number of visitors come to China every year.
【类比延伸】
1) the number of ：是“。。。的数目“ 的意思，谓语动词用单数
The number of private colleges has increased.
2) a number of 是“许多，大量“的意思。后接可数名词，谓语动词用复数。
A large number of students are going to visit the U.S. A.
【过关练习1】
1) The number of people invited ____ fifty , but a number of them _____ absent for different reason.
A. were; was B. was; was C. was; were D. were; were
2) ____ of people came to the meeting from all over the country.
A. Many B. A number C. The number D. A plenty of
3) ____ of the students in our school has increased to 300
A. A great number B.A great many
C. Plenty of D. the number
2. give out
【用法指南】
1) 及物动词用法，意为“分发，散发，发出（光、热声）
2) 不及物动词用法，意为“用尽、耗尽”
【典型例句】
His money soon gave out
The teacher gave out the exam papers to the students
The flowers gave out a sweet perfume
The machine gives out flashes of light
【拓展】
give out 当“分发”讲时与hand out同义
give off 也有“发光，烟、气味”之意
【过关练习2】
1) the moon gives ____ no light of its own.
A. off B. of C. with D. at
2) After the long-distance race, the woman athlete’s legs almost ____ under her.
A. gave out B. gave in C. gave up D. gave away
Part three: structure
1. Now imagine there has been a big earthquake.
【句型概况】
本句是一个祈使句，在动词imagine 后使用一个 there be句型充当imagine的宾语。There be句型表示“某个事物”在“什么地方”，其结构为“There + be + 主语＋其他成分”. 谓语动词按照救近一致原则。
【典型例句】
There is a desk and three chairs in the room.
There are three chairs and a desk in the room.
There is an old man living in the forest.
【拓展】
1） there be句型中 ，be 还可被live, stand, lie, exist
There stands a big tree on the top of the house.
There lies a large wheat field in front of the house..
2） there be句型中容易出错的地方
There has a baby over there. (错)
there is a baby is crying over there. （错）
【过关练习1】
1) there _____ a film in the hall this afternoon.
A. is going to have B. will have
C. will to be D. is going to be
2) There used to be a high tower here, ______?
A. wasn’t there B. wasn’t there C. usedn’t there D. used there
3) – there isn’t any milk left
-- oh, _____ ? I’ll get some in town. I’m going there later on
A. isn’t it B. isn’t there C. is there D. is it
4) --- You’ve booked on a four o’clock flight.
--- What chance ____ of taking an earlier plane?
A. there is B. is it C. there it is D. is there
5) Brain told you that there wasn’t anyone in the room at that time , ____ ?
A. was there B. wasn’t there C. didn’t he D. did he
2．Mice ran out of the field looking for places to hide.
【句型概况】
looking for places to hide 为现在分词短语，在句中作伴随状语，表示一个与谓语动词ran同时发生的动作，其逻辑主语为句子的主语，二者之间构成主谓关系。
【典型例句】
He sat by the desk, doing his homework.
He put a finger in his mouth , tasted it and smiled, looking pleased.
One woman was lying in bed , awake, listening to the rushing winds.
【拓展】
现在分词（短语）作时间、原因、条件、让步状语时，多位于句首；作结果、方式或伴随状语时， 通常位于句末。
(While) Working in the desk, doing his homework.(时间状语)
Being too old, he couldn’t walk that far. （原因状语)）
standing on the building, you can see the whole city. (条件状语)
Though raining heavily, it cleared up very soon.（让步状语)
He dropped the glass, breaking in into pieces. （结果状语)
They started his breath using a mouth-to-mouth way.（方式结果）
【过关练习2】
1) “We can’t go out in this weather,” said Bob, ____ out of the window.
A. looking B. to look C. looked D. Having looked
2) the visiting Minister expressed his satisfaction with the talk, ____ that he had enjoyed his stay here.
A. having added B. to add C. adding D. added
3) My cousin came to see me from the country, ____ me a full basket of fresh fruits.
A. brought B. bringing C. to bring D. had brought
4) “ Can’t you read?” Mary said ___ to the notice.
A. angrily pointing B. and point angrily
C. angrily pointed D. and angrily pointing
5) she set out soon after dark ____ home an hour later.
A. arriving B. to arrive having arrived D. and arrived
3． All hope was not lost.
【句型概况】
该句为部分否定。 all, both, everyone, everybody, everything以及“every+名词”都表示全部肯定； no one, none, nobody, nothing, not … any, 以及no+名词”都表示全部否定； 但当not出现在含有表示全部肯定的不定代词的句子中， 不管 not在它们之前或之后都表示部分否定。
【典型例句】
Both of them haven’t read this story.
All of the boy are clever, but none of them can work out this problem.
All bamboo grows tall, but some doesn’t.
【拓展】
1) any所修饰的名词或由any构成的复合不定代词作主语时， 谓语动词不能用否定时式。即只能说not… any,不能说any … not
2) 总括性副词如everywhere , always , altogether(全然地), wholly（全部地）和not连用时,也表示部分否定。
Such a thing can’t be found everywhere.
【过关练习3】
1. we couldn’t eat in a restaurant because ____ of us had _____ money.
A. all; not B. any; no C. none; any D. no one ; any
2) I agree with most of what you said , but I don’t agree with ______.
A. everything B. anything C. something D. nothing
3) _____ seen the film, so everyone wants to see it.
A. All the students haven’t B. Any students haven’t
C. As nobody has D. None of us has
篇4：必修1 unit5 Nelson Mandela 语言知识讲义(新课标版高一英语必修二教案教学设计)
Part One: Word
1． quality
『用法指南』
1） n. 质量，品质。性质
2） n. 属性，特性，特征
【典型例句】
This new model is of high quality and is not expensive either.
I prefer quality to quantity.
Kindness is his best quality.
One quality of sugar is that is sweet
『拓展』
1．） quality of leadership 领导才能
2) material of high/ poor / low quality 优质/劣质/质量很差的材料
『类比延伸』
1) characteristic 特色，特性，典型
Kindness is one of his characteristic.
A characteristic of the camel is its ability to live for a long time without water. 骆驼的特点事不喝水也能活很长时间。
2) feature 特征，特色
3） quantity 量； 数量
4） character 特点
『过关练习1』
1) This shirt is made of cloth of a poor ____
A. quality B. feature C. quantity D. characteristic
2) He proved himself a true gentleman and beauty of his ____ was seen as its best when he worked with others. (上海)
A temper B. appearance C. talent D. character
3) We should keep the fine ___ of the working people.
A. quality B. quantity C. qualities D. feature
用quality 和quantity的正确形式填空。
3）Vicky has all the ___ of a good manager
4) The photos are of poor _____.
5) Tom drank a small ____of water.
2． willing
【用法指南】
adj. 帮助的，乐于。。。的＝ be ready /eager to do sth.
【典型例句】
Are you willing to help
Are you willing to accept responsibility？ 你愿意承担责任吗？
【类比延伸】
1) willing 指对于别人的建议和要求迅速并高兴的同意。如：
The first requisite of a good citizen is that he shall be able and willing to pull his weight.
成为一个好公民的第一个要求事他能够并且乐意努力做好其分内的工作。
2) voluntary指没有强迫，自愿选择的活动。
She is a voluntary worker at the hospital.她是这家医院义务服务的。
『过关练习2』
1) I _____ that I have hurt her , but that’s not my real meaning
A. willing to admit B. an willing to admit
C. am willing to admitting D. willing to admitting
用willing / will/ wish填空
2）They are _____ workers.
3) Where there is a _____ , there is a way.
4) she wanted a new bike for Christmas and she got her _______.
5) I’m quite _____ for your brother to join us.
6） Our ______ for better time has come true.
3. fight
【用法指南】
1) vi. 打仗；战斗（常与with/ against连用）； 打架
2) vi. 争论
3) n. 战斗；打架；争论
【典型例句】
People often have to fight for their liberty.
人们往往不得不为自由而战
We must fight the government’s education policy.
（比喻）我们必须同政府得教育方针进行斗争。
The boxer has fought many opponents.
该拳手已与许多拳手交过锋
The two boys had a flight.
【拓展】
fight for … 为争取。。。而斗争
fight …against 为反对。。。而斗争
fight … with… 为反对。。。而斗争/ 和。。。并肩作战
fight with sb. about / over sth. 因某事和某人吵架
fight one’s way (out) 打出一条路来；艰苦奋斗
【类比延伸】
1) fight 在表示“斗争”的意思，包含含体力和勇猛的因素
2) struggle 在表示“斗争”的意思时，指肉体和精神上的搏斗包含着“奋力挣扎”的因素。如：
The soldiers fought bravely in the battle.
they struggled against poverty.
『过关练习3』
1) “We are fighting _____ an end to slavery , we won’t stop our fight ____ slavery until all slaves _____”, said Abraham Lincoln
A. for ; against ; set free B. for ; for; will be set free
C. against ; against; are set free D. for ; against; are set free
2) Two dogs ______ a bone , and a third dog ran away with it.
A. fought with B. fought against C. fought for D. fought to
3) The doctor have ____ a long battle ____ his life.
A. fight ; to saving B. fought ; to save
C. fight ; to saving D. fight ; to save.
4) we will have to ______ difficulties
A. fight for B. fight against C. fight with D. fight about
4.fear.
『用法指南』
1） n. 害怕，恐惧；担心；顾虑
2） vt.惧怕，害怕，担忧
『典型例句』
She has a great fear of fire 她极怕火
There is no fear of his getting any injury. 他不会受伤得
I fear that you’ll be late if you don’t go now.
如果你现在不走的话， 我担心你会迟到。
【拓展】
1) for fear of (doing) 唯恐
2) for fear (that) 唯恐；以免发生
3) in fear of sb./sth 处于害怕某人或某物的状态
4) I fear 很抱歉我必须说，恐怕（报告坏消息时使用）
『类比延伸』
1） fright 强调由于受到骤然的震惊而表现出的“惊怕”
2） fear 不管用作名词还是动词，基本上有两个含义，即“怕”或“担心“， 但口语中多于用be afraid of
3） be afraid of 后可跟名词或动名词；be afraid of 后可跟动词不定式，此时的含义是“怕“或”不敢“， be afraid后接可跟that从句，其含义是”恐怕“
I wasn’t afraid of the car. I was afraid of the driver.
I’m afraid I didn’t see the speed limit, officer, I must have been dreaming. 恐怕我没有看见限速标志，警官。 我一定思想开小差了。
『过关练习4』
1) I _____ that they must have set off.
A. frighten B. afraid C. surprise D. fear
2) We ____ at the sight of the long snake and didn’t dare to go forward
A. feared B. frightened C. were afraid of D. were frightened
3) He got to the station early, _____ missing his train. (江苏)
A. in case of B. instead of C. for fear of D. in search of
完成句子
4） The teacher refused to have his daughter in his class , ____ showing favour to her(恐怕会)
5） we spoke in whispers ____ we might wake the baby. (以免)
6） The chief went ____ constant ____ discovery （担心）
8） － Are we going to be late?
-- __________________. ( 恐怕会是如此)
Part two: phrase
1．get along
【用法指南】
1) 指人及活动进展
2) = get on 指（人）相处融洽
3） 继续，过下去
4）指（人）走开
【典型例句】
How is your work getting along? 你的工作进展如何
Do you get along well with your aunt? 你与你姑母相处得好吗？
We can get along without your help. 没有你的帮助我们也能行
I have to be getting along now. 我现在地走了。
【拓展】
get along with 进展， 过日子和。。。相处。。。
get away (from) 逃走，避免，摆脱
get back 回来
get down 降下
get down on one’s knees 跪下
get down to (doing) sth. 开始干某事
get in a word 插话
get in one’s way 挡路
get in touch with 与。。。联系
『过关练习1』
1) – The boss said we had only three days to finish the work.
-- Don’t worry. We have already ____ two thirds of it. (四川)
A. got down B. got through C. given in D. given away
2) Many gifted students ___ poorly in school because they found school unchallenging and as a result lost interest.
A. worked on B. got on C. lived on D. carried on
3) His idea of having weekly family meals together, which seemed difficult at first, has ____ many good changes on their lives.
A. got through B. resulted from C. turned into D. brought about
2． out of work
【用法指南】
out of work= out of a job
【典型例句】
My husband is out of work.
He has been out of work for a year.
【拓展】
out of breath 气喘吁吁
out of control 失控
out of date 过时
out of patience不耐烦
out of sight 看不见
out of hearing 听不见
out of business破产
out of action 失去作用
out of problem 毫无疑问
out of the problem 绝不可能
『过关练习2』
1) He ____ a week ago .
A. has been out of work B. has been out of job
C. lost his job D. has been jobless
2) He got through so much work in an hour, ____ breath.
A. under his B. below his C. without D. out of
3) Tony couldn’t keep pace with the others as they marched along. He stood often out off ____.
A. orders B. sight C. mind D. line
4) Much of the information in this book is now _____. Could you show me another one?
A. out of date B. out of the date C. old D. up to date.
5.) The children have been playing with my hat – they’ve knocked it out of _____.
A. shape B. size C. control D. line
3． come to power
【用法指南】
come to power= come into power(开始)掌权，上台
[典型例句]
Before long he came to power
【拓展】
come about 发生
come across 遇见
come along 一起来，过来
come back 回来
come back to life 复活，苏醒
come back to one’s mind 回忆起某事
come into effect 生效
come into use 开始使用
『过关练习3』
1) Please tell me how the accident _____. I am still in the dark. (2005江西)
A. came by B. came upon C. came to D. came about
2) The dictionary is being printed and it will soon ____.
A. turn out B. come out C. start out D. go out
3) It has been five years since the party_____, Many people wonder whether it will stay on.
A. has come to power B. came to power
C. has been in power D. in power
4． put sb. in / into prison
【用法指南】
将某人关进监狱
【典型例句】
she went t the prison to see her husband who was put into prison last month.
【拓展】
1） be in prison被监禁（表状态）
go to prison 入狱
send/ take sb. to prison 将某人关入监狱
cast / throw sb. into prison 将某人投入监狱
escape from prison 越狱
3) put away 拿开，放好，把。。。收起来；积蓄
put back 放回（原处）， 推迟
put down 放下，记下；镇压
put forward提出（计划）
put into practice 实行，付诸实施
put off 推迟，延迟
『过关练习4』
1) _____ to use in the 1990’s , this machine made great contributions to the rapid development of our company.
A. Putting B. Put C. Having put D. Being put
2) You can take anything from the shelf and read, but please ____ the books when you’ve finished with them(2004全国)
A. put on B. put down C. put back D. put off
3) The pickpocket ____ last year.
A. was sent to the prison
B. was sent to prison
C. has been sent to prison
D. was sent to the prison
4) We have to ____ her bad temper.
A. put up B. put into practice
C. put up with D. put off
Part three： Structure
1. We first broke the law in a way which was peaceful ; when this not allowed… only then did we decide to answer violence with violence.
【句型概括】
1) in a way which was peaceful= in a peaceful way, which引导了一定语从句，先行词是way.
2) only 位于句首，修饰副词、介词短语或状语从句时，主句采用部分倒装的语序。
【典型例句】
Only in a large city was it possible to buy a new wheelchair.
Only when the war was over in 1949 was he able to get back home.
『拓展』
部分倒装还有：
1． 否定副词如no, not , never, seldom, little, hardly,以及含有 no, not的短语放在句首时，句子要部分倒装。如：
Never in my life have I heard such a thing
Little did we expect that he could come
Not a single word did he say at the meeting
2) 以否定词开头的关联结构：No sooner… than ; Hardly…/
Scarcely … when … ; Not only… but also… ; Not until… 如：
Not until late in the evening did he come back.
『过关练习1』
1) Only after my friend came ____ ( 2005福建)（
A. did the computer repair
B. he repair the computer
C. was the computer repaired
D. the computer was repaired
2) I failed in the final examination last term and only then ____ the importance of studies. (2004重庆)
A I realized B. I had realized
C. had I realized D. did I realize
3) Only after you have reached eighteen_____ the army.
A. you can join B. you can join in
C. can you join D. can you join in
4) Only when the war was over _____________ to his hometown.
A. did the young soldier return
B. the young soldier returned
C. returned the young soldier
D. the young soldier did return
篇5：必修2 unit1 Cultural relics语言知识讲义(新课标版高一英语必修二教案教学设计)
Part One : Words
1．remain
[用法指南]
1)vi 剩下，余留
2）vi.留下，逗留(=stay)
3）vi仍然时，保持，依然
4）remain + adj. ? n/ p.p./ to be done
【典型例句】
I went to the city , but my brother remain at home.
After the fire , very little remain of my house 大火过后，寒舍所乘无几。
Let thins remain as they are 一切保持原样吧
【拓展】
remaining adj. 剩下的（作前置定语）
remain standing / seated （一直站着、坐着）
remain / keep silent （保持沉默）
注意：
remain 只能用作不及物动词，不能用于被动语态。表示”…留下来被做时“ 采用句式 “sth. remain to be done”
【类比延伸】
remain/ stay都指“继续停留“或”继续保持某种关系“，状态或行动。 remain常可与 stay互换，但它强调”人或物“继续停留于一处或保持原来状态，情况性质而不改变。 ”stay’强调“人在一定的场所逗留不离开”
【过关练习1】
The pilot asked all the passengers on board to remain ______ as the plane was making a landing. (2004上海春)
A seat B. seating C. seated D. to be seating
2) Having a trip abroad is certainly good for the old couple, but it remains _______ whether they will enjoy it ( 全国)
A to see B. to be seen C. seeing D. seen
2．consider
[用法指南]
考虑,打算
consider +n.
consider +v.ing
consider + wh + to do
2) vt. 认为, 把… 看作(同 think , regard)
consider sb. / sth. + adj./n.
consider sb. / sth. to be…
consider sb. / sth. as……. ? that clause
3) vt. 考虑；照顾；体谅
【典型例句】
I’m considering going abroad. ( 我正在考虑出国)
I consider it ( to be / as ) a great honour.我认为这是极大得荣幸。
If you consider that she has only been studying English a year, she speaks it very well. 想想她学英语才一年，她的英语已经说得相当好了。
【拓展】
consider后接不定式作宾补时， 要用to be 或 to have done.
consider 后不能接to do作宾语。
considering prep.&conj. 就。。。而论； 照。。。来看。
【类比延伸】
consider… as…. 侧重“经过考虑而认为”， 表示“一种比较客观的看法.
regard…. as,,, 指“把。。。认为..”、“把。。。看作。。”表示“以外部形象得出认识或个人得主观认识。
treat… at…表示“在某种认识的基础上看待或对待”重在行动，而不在认识。
【过关练习】汉译英
你不能把他看作一个自私的人。
我本来想聘史密斯先生，后来认为你更适合干这个工作。
就英文只学了一年而论，他的英语已说得很好了。
单项选择
Many things ___ impossible in the past ate quite common today.
A. having being considered B. considered
C. to be considered D. considering
5) Charle Babbage is generally considered ____ the first computer.
A. to invent B. inventing
C. to have invent D. having invented
3． rare
【用法指南】
adj. 稀罕的；希有的（常意味着珍贵，难得）
adj. 极好的；极度的
adj. (尤指空气)稀薄的
【典型例句】
It’s rare for him to be late. 他很少迟到。
The rare air of the mountains makes people difficult to breathe.
山上稀薄的空气使人难以呼吸。
【类比延伸】
short adj. 短缺的； 不足量的（常用于缺少量的前面） be short of……
rare adj. 指罕见而珍贵的事物； 很少发生的事或人的行为反常等； 关于时间，常用rare.
scare adj. 指有用而不够。
【过关练习】
用rare ,short, scare填空
1). Gold is a ______ metal.
2) He gave me ____ change.
3)Good fruit is ____ just now, and costs a lot.
4) – How about your holiday, Lily?
-- Oh, it was great. We _____ by the seaside.
A. saw a lot of people
B. had rare fun
C. really wanted a rest
D. rarely played so well
4. furniture
【用法指南】
n.(U家具（总称）
【典型例句】
They bought much new furniture.他们买了一些家具。
There are four pieces of furniture in our house.在我们房子里有四件家具。
This old French table is a very valuable piece of furniture.这张旧的法国桌子是一件很贵重的家具。
【拓展】
furniture 不论受什么词修饰，其前面不能加不定冠词a也不用复数。furniture若要表示其数目时，”一件家具” 表达为a piece of furniture; 许多件家具用pieces of (articles of ) furniture;“一套家具”则用a set of furniture..说多少家具时，不用many, few而用much 或little
【过关练习】
We have a staff of 28 but there ____ in the office.
haven’t many furnitures B. aren’t many furnitures
C. hasn’t much furniture D. isn’t enough furniture
5. doubt
【用法指南】
n. 怀疑，疑问
There is no doubt about …. / that clause
throw doubt upon…对。。。表示怀疑
without doubt 毫无疑问地
I have no doubt about… / that-clause
I have some doubt whether…
(2) vt. 怀疑，不信
doubt sb./ sth.
doubt if / whether… (肯定句)
don’t doubt that…..（否定句或疑问句）
【典型例句】
I doubt the truth of it. 我怀疑此事地真实程度。
I don’t doubt that John will come on time. 我相信约翰一定会准时。
There is some doubt about whether John will come on time.约翰会不会准时来还不太确定。
【拓展】
doubt n. 在否定句和疑问句中，其后地同位语从句用that引导； 在肯定句中，则用whether引导。
doubt v. 在否定句和疑问句中，其后地宾语从句用that引导；在肯定句中，其后地宾语从句用if 或whether引导。
【过关练习】
1）______ is no doubt that the Chinese team will win this game and become the champion team again this year.
A. It B. There C. That D. As
2) I have no doubt ______ we shall be able to do something for you.
A. that B. if C. what D. why
根据汉语，完成句子。
3) I doubt __________ . 这事实是否属实。
4) I _____________. 不相信他人老实。
5) Does any one __________________. 怀疑它原来如此吗？
6) We all have no doubt ____________ 台湾会回归中国。
Part two : phrase
1. belong to
【用法指南】
属于； 为。。。的财产
为。。。的一员
和。。。有关联
【典型例句】
That dictionary belongs to the library. 那本词典是图书馆的。
He belongs to the trade union. 他是工会会员。
That key belongs to the lock. 那个钥匙是开这把锁的。
注意：belong to 没有被动语态， 不用于进行时态，后面不能接名词性的物主代词。
【拓展】
belong vi. 合适， 对。。。合适或有用；处在适当的位置
I belong here. 我住在这里
Put it where it belongs 把它放在应放的地方
A telephone belongs in every home 电话对每户家庭都有用。
2) belongs财产，所有物；行李
[过关练习1]
1) This is a dictionary ______ me.
A. belong B. belongs C. belonged D. belonging
2) To all the people here _____ the honour for the success.
A. belong to B. belongs to C. belong D. belongs
3) If the dictionary _____ you , put it where it _______.
A. doesn’t belong to; belongs to
B. isn’t belong to ; is belonged
C. doesn’t belong to ; belongs
D. isn’t belong to; is belonged to
2． at war
【用法指南】
（常与with连用）与。。。处于战争状态； 同。。。进行竞争
【典型例句】
Germany was at war with almost all the countries during world War Two. 二战中德几乎同所有国家处于战争状态。
we both have been at war with each other for years.多年以来我们一直相互竞争。
【拓展】
介词at意为 “在。。。之中“，表状态； 有：
be at war
be at school 在上学
be at table 在就餐，在吃饭
be at peace 处于和平状态
be at work 在工作
be at rest 静止
【类比延伸】
at war 强调“处于交战德状态之中“， 常见的结构为be at war with..
in the war 意为“在战争中“
in battle 强调“处于战斗之中” 与in the war 有时可以通用，只不过battle往往指局部战斗；in the war 指全面战争。
注意： on也可表示“在。。。中”其常用搭配有：on strike（罢工）, on business（出差）, on leave（休假） ; on duty（值班）; on show(在展览); on sale（出售）, on fire （在着火）; on holiday (度假中)
【过关练习2】
翻译
他参加了越南战争。
他在战斗中身亡。
二战中许多国家处于战争状态。
＃ 用适当的介词填空
They are ____ a friendly visit to China.
I was _____ table when an old friend visited me.
The two countries used to be _____ war, but now they are ____ peace.
Many workers were ____ strike because of poor par.
3．do with
【用法指南】
与。。。相处；对付
处理，处置（＝manage）
忍受 （＝bear）
（与can, could连用） 表示需要或愿望
【典型例句】
Such people are difficult to do with.这样的人很难对付。
What have you done with the letter? 你是如何处理这封信的？
We can’t do with such carelessness. 我们不能忍受这样的粗心。
You look as if you could do with a good night’s sleep. 你看上去好像需要好好睡一觉。
【类比延伸】
deal with / do with表示“应付，处理”时可以换用。但有区别:
deal with中deal是不及物动词， 没有宾语，常跟作with搭配，所以与what连用。
do with需要接两个宾语一个作do的宾语，另一个作with的宾语，所以与what连用。
【过关练习3】
◎翻译
我们应该怎样招待客人呢？
我受不了吵闹的音乐。
我要一杯茶。
放假之后我们不知道怎样打发时间。
Do you know _____ to do with the rubbish?
A. where B. what C. how D. why
Part three structure
1．Why not 为什么不？
【用法指南】
why (not) do sth. 是一个常见的句型。
why do sth? ( Why do you do…?) 有时含有责备的意味； why not do sth.?(= Why don’t you do…?)常用来表示建议。此外， Why not?还可以表示“为什么不” “为什么不行”或者“当然好呀‘。
【典型例句】
why not study harder?
Why take the book without my permission?
为什么没有我的允许就拿走了这本书。
―Let’s go swimming.
-- Why not?
【拓展】
1) You’d better do sth.
2) I think you…
3) I advise you to do sth.
4) I suggest that you (should) …
5) What/ How about….?
6) Would you like to…
7) What do you think of….,?
【过关练习1】
－Let’s go to a movie after work?
-- ___________ (2005山东)
A Not at all B. Why not?
C. Never mind D. What if it?
2) – We are in great need of help.
-- _______ ask them to do you a favor?
A. How about B. why don’t
C. why not D. why didn’t
3. – How about going for a walk?
-- ________________.
A. That will take us an hour for a walk
B. Walking is a kind of sports
C. I’ll go for a walk with you
D. That’s a good idea
2. There is no doubt that the boxes were then put on a train for Konigsberg at that time a German city on the Baltic Sea
毫无疑问，这些箱子后来被装上火车运往哥尼斯堡，当时它是波罗的海边的一个德国城市。
【用法指南】
There is no doubt that ….表示“毫无疑问” ， 是一个固定的句式
【典型例句】
There is no doubt that he is guilty.毫无疑问，他是有罪的。
There is some doubt whether Peter will come on time. 彼得是否准时来还是个问题。
There is not much doubt about it 那件事情没有什么可疑之处。
【拓展】
There is no …句型
There is no need to do sth. 没有必要做某事
There is no difference …. 没有区别
There is no point in doing sth. 做某事没有意义或没有作用
there is no time left for… 没留下时间做。。。
there is no possibility… 不可能。。。
【过关练习2】
1）____ is no possibility _____ Bob can win the first prize in the match.
A. There ; that B. It ; that
C. There ; whether D. It ; whether
2) Since you have repaired my TV set, ______ is no need for me to buy a new one. (2002shanghai春)
A. It B. there C. this D. that
3.) Can you doubt ____ he will win ?
A. whether B. if C. that D. when
3． There design for the room was if the fancy style popular in those days.【用法指南】
“be of +抽象名词” 相当于“be+ 抽象名词的形容词”，本结构常用来一个人或物的特征；其中“of＋抽象名词”相当于该名词的同根形容词；此类词有：help/ helpful; value/ valuable; use/ useful; interest/ interesting; importance/ important; effect/ effective; benefit/ beneficial.
上述不可数名词可以用以下短语修饰：
great ,good , much, some , little , no, any 等。
【典型例句】
The decision is of great importance / very important.
I find the dictionary of great use.= I find the dictionary useful
The present is of no practical value.= The present isn’t valuable practically.)
You’ll find the dictionary is of great help to your study of English .
【拓展】
be of+ a/an +普通名词， 表示“同一的”，相当于”be (of) the same + 名词； 此类词有：height, shape, weight, age, size, colour, type, width.
be + of +名词, 还可以作定语或补足语。
【过关练习3】
You’ll find this map of great _____ in helping you to get round London.
A. price B. cost C. value D. usefulness
2) The two students _____ had a lot discussion over the question.
A. with the same age B. as old
C. of an age D. the same age
3) This book is ________ no my translation, but that one is ______.
A. great help ; helpless B. a great help; of no use
C. important; of few importance D. very helpful; of few importance
完成句子：
4）The two clothes are ________ . (一样大)
5)．The book is _____. (很有趣)
6.) I found your discovery _______（很重要）
篇6：必修2 unit2 The Olympic Games语言知识讲义(新课标版高一英语必修二教案教学设计)
part one words
1. compete
【用法指南】
vi 比赛；对抗
【典型例句】
1） John competed for a place at the school, but he didn’t give in.
约翰在学校里竞争一个职位，但没有成功。
2） Five children competed in the race.
五个孩子参加赛跑。
3） Although there only four horsed competing, it was an exciting race.
虽然只有四匹马赛跑，但比赛很精彩。
【拓展】
1）competition n. 况赛
competitor. n. 参赛者
competitive adj. 竞赛的
2) compete in 在某一方面竞争
compete for 为。。。 而竞争
compete with / against 与。。。竞争
compete with/ against sb. for sth. 为得到某物与某人竞争
【类比延伸】
1） compete的含义仅仅是为了争得名次、奖品、合同。并不含有将对手征服得意思。例如：
The children compete against each other to reach the other end of the pool.孩子们互相竞争着抵达池子的另一端。
2） vie (with ) 与compete 相比，词义弱得多，包含着争夺得兴奋，激动，因此这种竞争与其说是“争夺”不如说是嬉戏，或者争先恐后。如：The two boys vie with each other for the first place.
3） contest 所表示的“竞争”可以是友谊赛，也可以是有故意的竞赛，旨在比试技能、能力、力气、耐力等。如：
The two armies are contesting every inch of ground.两军正争夺每一寸土地。
【过关练习1】
汉译英
1） 几家公司正在为争取一项合同而相互竞争。
2） 他相信没有人能与他抗衡。
3） 有多少人参加马拉松比赛。
4） 他们为了赢得奖牌而相互竞争。
5） He’s going to ____ his old rival in the second round.
A. compete B. compete for
C. compete with D. be competitor
6) – More than thirty students competed _____ each other in the English competition
-- But they could only compete ____ three medals .
A. against; with B. against ; on
C. with ; for D. on; for
2. host
【用法指南】
1） vt 主人招待；主办或主持某项活动。
2） n. 主人； （电视等） 节目主持人
【典型例句】
1) China will host the 29th Olympic Gamers in .
中国将在主办第29届奥运会。
2) Hosting our show this evening is the lovely Mary.
我们今晚得演出由美丽得玛丽主持。
3) He acted as host to his father’s friends.
他当主人款待父亲的朋友。
【拓展】
1） host country (比喻)奥林匹克运动会的主办国。
2） be/ play host to sb. （作为主人）招待或款待某人
3） host vt, 做东； 主办；主持；
n. 主人， 东道主
hostess n. 女主人
【类比延伸】
host / hold / own
host指作为主人来主办或主持某项活动
hold 只单纯的表示“举办， 举行”
own 表示“拥有”或“承认”
【过关练习】
完成句子
1） Mr. Brown was __________ . (我们晚会的主人)
2） ____________ ( 客队和主队 ) won each of the games , so they were even with each other.
3） Which country _________ ? （将主办今年的运动会）
4） He first came to China and I _______. （作为主人款待他）
5） _______ the Olympic Games is a great honor for a country.
A. Host B. Hosting C. Hold D. Holding
3． admit
【用法指南】
1） vt. 让。。。进入， 允许。。进入（常to和into或连用
2） vt. 接纳；招待；容纳
3） vt. 承认(后接名词； v-ing形式； that从句；sb./sth. to be等)
4） vi. 容许有（常与of连用）
5） vi 承认(常与to连用)
【典型例句】
1） This ticket admits two people to the basketball match.
这张票可供两人入场看篮球赛。
2） The college admits two thousand new boys and girls every year.
这所大学每年招收2，000男女新生。
3） The cinema admits about 3,000 people.
这座电影院大约可坐3，000人。
4） He admitted to the teacher that he was wrong.
他向老师承认他错了。
【拓展】
1) be admitted to / into… 获准进入/参加
2) be admitted as …. 作为。。。 被接受
3) admit doing 承认，公认，招认
【过关练习3】
1. I admitted ______ done wrong.
A. to have B. being C. that he D. having
2. – By the way, how about your salary last month?
-- The boss had to admit _____ back $200 from my salary for no good reason.
A. keep B. keeping C. kept D. to have kept
完成句子
3) He _______ (被接受称为) a member of the baseball team.
4) You were supposed to __________ . (承认冤枉了她)
5）He _____ (入院) with minor burns.
6.） George would never ______ (认错)
4．allow
【用法指南】
1） vt. 允许；准许
allow sb. to do sth. 允许某人做某事
allow doing sth. 允许做某事
allow sb. in / out 允许某人进入/出去
allow sb. sth.允许某人某事
#不能说allow to do sth.
2)vi. 考虑到；估计； （常与for连用）
【典型例句】
1） We don’t allow smoking in the office. 我们不允许在办公室吸烟。
2） She allowed her daughter to go to the party她允许她得女儿去参加晚会。
3） You are allowed to speak loudly in class. 你们不允许在课堂上大声说话。
4） Has everything been allowed for in your plan?
你得计划是否把各种情况都考虑进去了？
【类比延伸】
allow / permit / let
allow 和permit都表示允许，用法也一样，在许多情况下可以相互替换，只是词义的强弱上有些差别。
allow 词义较弱，含有“听任”， “默许“、“不加阻止”的意思。
permit 词义较强，强调“正式认可”“批准”的意思。
let 表示“让”词义罪最弱，较口语化，用法也不同与allow和permit; let后的宾语不足语为不带to的不定式；let 一般不用于被动语态。
【过关练习4】
完成句子
1）Your gift ___________ (使我可以买一部车)
2） She ____________________ (不允许房子内有狗)
3）My father ___________. (给我一些钱买书)
4）The facts _______________ . (不容另作解释)
5）Teachers usually _________ (不允许学生查字典) in the exam.
6) He is said to ______ to his country because a new president comes to power.
A. be allowed to return B. allow to return
C. allow returning D. be allowed returning
5. promise
【用法指南】
1） vt. 许诺；答应（常与to, that连用）
promise + n. 许诺某事
promise sb. to do sth 向某人许诺做某事
promise （sb）. that… 向某人许诺。。。
2) n, 诺言
make a promise
give a promise
keep /carry out a promise
break a promise
【典型例句】
1） He has given a promise to write to me.他答应要给我写信。
2） I promised him to behave better henceforth 我答应他今后表现得好些。
3） This year promises to be another good one for harvests 今年看来又是个丰收年。
【过关练习】
1） Early mist_________ (预示好天气)
2） She _____________ (答应弟弟) that she would write to him.
3） He ______ (不遵守诺言) and did not come to see me.
4） Remember to __________ (履行你得诺言)
5） If you _____ (许下诺言0 , you should _____ ;You shouldn’t ______ (违背诺言)
Part two phrase
1. find out
【用法指南】
1） 查明，；如通过观察或询问查明（某事）
I found out the phone number by looking it up. If you are no sure, find out.通过查找，我查到了电话号码。 如果你不肯定，查一查
Please find out when the ship sails for New York.
2） 发现；揭露
I’ve found you out at last.我终于把你揭露了
The criminals tried to run away ,but the police found out. 犯罪企图逃跑，但警察发现了。
【过关练习1】
1) If you want to do the job well, you must ____ how to do it fast first.
A. find B. B. find out C. look for D. look at
2). Don’t worry . You’ll soon _______ how to solve the problem.
A. find B. discover C. find out D. look for
3.) – Did you ______ where she lived?
--- No, I didn’t.
A. find B. discover C. look at D. find out
4) I am _____ my book everywhere but I haven’t ____ it yet.
A. found ; found B. looking for ; looked at
C. looking for; found D. looking for ; found out
2. a set of
【用法指南】
一组；一套
1）a set of tools 一套工具
2) a set of six dining chairs 一套六把得餐椅
3) a set of false teeth 一套假牙
4) a set of Dickens novels. 一套狄更斯得小说
5) a set of golf clubs 一套高尔夫球杆
6) a bit of luck 一点运气
【拓展】
1） a series of lectures 一系列演讲
2） a series of days 连续几天
3） a chain of proof 一连串证据
4） a train of mourners 一长队送葬者
5） a pair of shoes 一双鞋
6） a mountain of trouble许多麻烦
7） a pile of trouble 一大堆麻烦
【过关练习】
1） 一套园艺工具
2） 一组指纹
3） 一套21件的茶具
4） 一连串的音乐会
5） 电视连续剧
6） 一大堆工作
7） 一堆旧书
8） 一条裤子
3. every four years
【用法指南】
every与数词连用， 表示时间或空间的间隔，译作“每（隔）……”。具体用法为:
1) every +基数词+复数名词
2) every +序数词+单数名词
3) every +other+ 单数可数名词
4) every +few +复数名词
【典型例句】
1） every two days = every second day = every other day 每两天(每隔一天)
2） every three years = every third year 每三年
3） every other line 每隔一行
4） every few meters 每隔几米
* 注意： 不能将every更改为each； few前不能加a
【过关练习3】
1)When I was in the countryside , I would go to the river bank _____.
A. each second day B. every a few days
C. each two days D. every few days
2). When the old was ill in hospital , we went to look after him ____ by turns.
A. every a days B. every two days
C. everyday D. every the second day
4. used to
【用法指南】
过去常常，表示以前经常做某事，而现在不做了。
【典型例句】
1）I used to go there every year.
2) He is not what he used to be.
【类比延伸】
used to / would / used to / get/ become used to …
1) used to 有较强的今昔对比的含义。表示过去持续的状态；客观的陈述过去存在，但现在已经停止的情况或习惯。如
I used to be drink coffer, but now I drink tea instead.
2 ) would 强调过去习惯性的，反复发生的动作，含有较强的主观感情色彩。可以跟sometimes, frequently , for hours等表示时间的副词(短语)连用。
Sometimes John would sit for hours without saying a word.
3） use to
①习惯于。。。
He’s not used to making speeches in public ; it’s so embarrassing.
② 被用来做。。。
This machine is used to make farm tools.
= This machine is used for making farm tools.
4） get/become used to 从不习惯到习惯
You’ll get used to the work in short time.
5. more than
【用法指南】
1） more than ＋数词 ， 表示“超过， 多于”
2） 修饰形容词、副词、动词、分词、或动名词时，起到加强语气或程度的作用，表示“十分、几乎”
3） more than 修饰名词时，表示“不仅仅是， 不只是”同not only.
【典型例句】
1） The school is more than 10 kilometers from my home.
2） She speaks English more than fluently
3） China Daily is more than a newspaper , it help to improve our English.
【拓展】
more … than …
1) 与其说。。。倒不如说。。。
She is more lazy than unintelligent.她与其智力差，不如说懒惰。
2) 不。。。更多
He has made much more progress this year than ( he did ) last year.
6. as well as…
【用法指南】
1） 用于比较状语从句，表“和。。。一样好”如“
He speaks French as well as English.
2) 用作复合介词，相当于not only …but also…; as well as 重点强调其前面的人或事，而not only …. but also…重点强调后面的人或事。
1) Li Ping as well as Wei Fang and Wabg Ling was praised be the coach.
2) The little girl sings as well as playing the piano
The girl is lively as well as healthy
注意：当连接名词或代词作主语时， 谓语动词的形式由前者决定。
【过关练习6】
1) E-mail, as well as telephone , _____ an important part in daily communication.
A. is playing B. are playing
C. have played D. play
2) John plays football _____ if not better than ,David.
A. as well B. as well as C. so well D. so well as
3) She doesn’t speak ____ her friend, but her written work is excellent.
A. as well as B. so often as
C. so much as D. as good as
4) ____ snacks and drinks, but they also brought cards for entertainment when they has picnic in the forest.
A. Not only they bought B. Not only did they bring
C. Not only brought they D. Not only they did bring
7. pick up
【用法指南】
1）拾起，捡起
Pick up the box by the handles
2） 收拾，整理
Please pick up all your toys when you have finished playing
3） 改善， 改进
Mary has been ill, but she’s picking up now.
4） （从无线电）收听
We picked up signals for help from the burning plane
5）车船途中搭人，载货
The bus stopped to pick up the passengers.
6）用车接人
I will pick you up at the station
7）买东西
I picked up a valuable coin at a very low price.
8）通过实践学会（语言，技术）
Where did you pick up your excellent English?
【过关练习7】
1. Under good treatment , Linda is beginning to _____ and will soon recover.
A. pick up B. wake up C. grow up D. show up
2. Something is wrong with my radio . It can’t _____ and programme.
A. take in B. get up C. pick up D. listen to
3. Without proper lessons, you could _____ a lot of bad habits when playing the piano.
A. put up B. take up C. pick up D. grow up
4. When he went abroad , he ______ Japanese.
A. looked up B. picked up C. turned up D. made up
Part three : structure
1. I have come to your time to find out about the present day Olympic Games because I know that in they are to be held in my hometown of Athens
【用法指南】
be to do 表示将来
1）表示按计划安排将要发生的动作。
2）表示命令、禁止等
3）表示注定要发生的事
4）用于条件句中，侧重于表示计划、安排要发生的将来的动作。
【典型例句】
1）He was very interested in making things when he was young. He was to become a great inventor.
小时候他就对制作东西感兴趣，他注定要成为一个伟大的发明家。
2) You are not to stand here.
你不可以站在这儿。
3) Their daughter is to be married soon.
他们的女儿很快就要结婚了。
4) The president is to attend the opening ceremony of the Olympic Games.
总统将参加奥运会的开幕式。
【拓展】
1) be to do 不能表示不受人们意志控制的将来的动作。此时要用be going to 。如：It’s going to rain.
2) be about to do 表示马上要发生的动作常与when连用，意为“这时” 而且后面不与时间状语连用。
【过关练习1】
1） No one _____ this building without the permission of the police.
A. is leaving B. is to leave C. has left D. will be leaving
2) I feel it is your husband who _____ for the spoiled child .
A. is to blame B. is going to blame
C. is to be blamed D. should blame
3. In such dry weather , the flowers will have to be watered if they ________.
A. have survived B. are to survive
C. would survive D. will survive.
4. If a man _____ succeed, he must work as hard as he can.
A. will B. is to C. is going to D. should
2. A special village is built for the competitors to live in, a stadium for competitions, a very large swimming pool, a gymnasium as well as seats for those who watch the games.
有一个特殊的村庄供参赛的人住。 并提供比赛用场地，很大的游泳池，室内体育馆，还有观众席呢。
【用法指南】
for the competitors to live in 属于不定式的复合结构（for sb. to do sth.）在句中作定语，修饰a special village.
1) 不定式复合结构的省略。
为避免重复，不定式结构的动词部分常可以承前省略，尤其在（want , would like, be happy , used to）
【典型例句】
1） I went there because I wanted to.
注意：不定式为to be或to have done 结构时，be和have不能省。如： He is fatter than he used to be.
2) 不定式复合结构在句中作定语。
作定语的不定式的为不及物动词，或者不定式所修饰的名词或代词是不定式动作的地点、工具等，不定式后必须加上相应的介词，如look after , search for, listen to , depend on , laugh at , care for , look at 等。如：
He found a good house to live in.
The child has nothing to worry about.
They have no happiness to speak of.
【过关练习2】
1） The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in street, but his mother told him ______.
A. not to B. not to do C. not do it D. do to to
2) – Alice , why didn’t you come yesterday?
-- I _____ , but I had an unexpected visitor.
A. had B. would C. was going to D. did
3.) When I handed the report to John , he said that George was the person _________.
A. to send B. for sending it C. to send it to D. for sending it to
3. women are not only allowed to join in but play a very important role…
【用法指南】
not only… but also… 不但。。。而且。。。
1) 连接除主语以外的成分时，如果位于句首，not only 后的句子要倒装。
2) 连接主语时，谓语动词必须和邻近的主语保持一致。
【拓展】
either… or…和neither… nor….连接主语时，谓语也要遵循就近原则
【典型例句】
1) He not only said it ,but also did it.
2) Not only has he been to China , but also he knows some Chinese.
3) Not only he but also I am responsible for it.
4) Neither you nor Tom is interested on pop music.
【过关练习3】
1）Either you or the headmaster _____ the prize to the gifted students at the meeting.
A. is handing out B. are to hand out
C. are handing out D. is to hand out
2) Not only ____ the exam , but also won the first place.
A. he passed B. he did pass C. did he pass D. passed he
汉译英
3）不仅他而且我也想出国。
4）他不仅帮助了我，而且还给了我一些钱。
4． Where will all the competitors be staying?
【用法指南】
will be doing 为将来进行时表示某一时刻或某一段时间里正在进行的动作，也可以表示预料将要发生的动作。
【典型例句】
1) At this time tomorrow , we will be having the exam.
2) We will be leaving for Beijing
【过关练习4】
1) this time tomorrow morning __________ ? (你将在干什么)
2) If free this afternoon , I will ________ (在机场为朋友送行)
3) _____________________ (将告诉他) about it when I see him again.
4) – Mike , the phone is ringing , Do you want me to go?
-- No, sit still. ___________.
A． I am about to get it B. I’m getting it
C. I’ll get it D. I’m go get it
篇7：浙江省建德市严州中学高一英语新课标第三单元语言要点(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
编者：吴国生 校对：杨志良
一、重要短语
Warming up P17
1. spend a holiday with sb.与某人一起度假
2. find out 发现 查明
3. one-way fare 单程费
4. arrive in/at到达=reach=get to
Reading P18
5. dream about 梦想到
6. graduate from 毕业于
7. persuade sb. to sth.说服了某人去做某事
8. change one’s mind 改变主意
9. be excited about对……感到激动
10. make up one’s mind 下定决心
11. give in 让步 屈服
12. pass through通过
13. travel across 横过
Learning about language P20
14. no matter how hard无论多么努力
15. take off 脱下；起飞
16. as soon as possible尽可能快
17. instead of 代替，而不是
18. so many beautiful things 如此多的美丽东西
Discovering useful structures P20-21
19. the present continuous tense 现在进行时态
20. according to根据
21. have an English party举办一个英语晚会
22. give some performances表演
23. be sure about对……感到确信
24. get something ready 把……准备好
25. in town在城里
26. thank you for…… 由于……感谢你
27. good luck祝你好运
Using language P22
28. so---that---如此……以至于……
29. in front of在……的前面（外部）
30. in the front of 在……的前面（内部）
31. as usual像往常一样
32. be great fun是非常有趣的（fun是一个不可数名词）
33. change from---into---把……换成……；把……变成……；
34. make camp野营
35. put up our tents搭起帐篷
36. stay awake仍然醒着的；保持醒着的
37. so far到目前为止
38. change his attitude改变他的态度
Reading and writing P23
39. put---into---把……放（写）进……
40. for one thing，…… ；for another, …… 一则由于……；再则由于……
41. be different from…… 与……不同
42. be familiar to对某人来说是熟悉的
二、重点语法
Some words can be used for the present continuous tense to express future actions according to one’s plan. 有些单词的现在进行时可以用来表示一般将来时
Please learn and remember the following:请记住以下的动词
go come leave stay start arrive return sleep work have see give
For example:
1. We are leaving on Friday
2. Are you staying here till next week?
3. I am seeing the doctor this afternoon.
4. Where are you going tomorrow?
5. A foreign guest is giving a lecture in English this afternoon.
6. We are having a holiday next Sunday.
二、佳句必背
1. (P18) My sister Wang Wei and I have dreamed about taking a great bike trip.
我的姐姐王薇和我一直梦想作一次伟大的自行车旅行
2. (P18)It was my sister who（=that） first had the idea to cycle along the Mekong River. 是我的姐姐第一个想到沿湄公河骑车旅行。
3. (P18)Then she persuaded me to buy one（=a bike）
然后她说服了我也买一辆自行车
4 (P18)She insisted that we(should) find the source of the river.
她坚持要求我们应该找到河的源头
5 (P18)Once she has made her mind, nothing can change it. Finally I had to give in.
一旦她下定了决心，没有什么能够改变它
6 (P18)It becomes rapids as it passes through deep valleys, traveling across
western Yunnan Province.
它（湄公河）在流过云南西部时，当它穿过深谷时候就变成急流。
7 (P22)It was so quiet in the mountains that night that there was almost no wind.
那天晚上在群山中是如此安静以至没有丝毫之风。
篇8：模块一 第一单元 (新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
模块一 第一单元
词汇过关
1.重点单词拼写
1) She is 70 years old, and the skin has become l .
2) It is a idea to play football all day without a break.
3) We usually use g , such as waving, nodding our heads, to talk to people who is far away.
4) To avoid this pollution disaster in the future, we should not i it anymore and please try to pay more attention to our atmosphere.
5）Thank you for your c about the matter of the hawkers in Tak Tai Street.
6) The Smiths are tired of moving now and then and when they got to this little town of California, they finally s down.
7) Most of the farmers in my hometown go out to work at dawn and get back at d .
8) Unlike the grown-ups, most of the t in middle schools are more sensitive than rational.
9) Sorry, I’m not so sure. If you could give me some t , perhaps I could know the answer.
10) “Oh, Sam, I’m only having you on. No need to be u .” said
Frodo.
2. 重点词词形变换
1）It would be to demand of a person who is lack of power of
to become a detective. That’s one of the why I think he is more suitable to be a worker. (reason)
2) Joanna is quite angry that she was by the boss in this task. But in fact I think if she thinks so, she is merely for she is completely in of this task. (ignore)
3) No man can imagine the he got when he lost the game. In fact he was a . He had the ability to win, but he was forced to lose the game. It was for him. (suffer)
4) All the members came to an that Kitty had an voice and that only when she to, should we ask someone else to represent our school to take part in the speech contest. (agree)
5) The doctor asked the patient to be confident in his from the disease, for this kind of disease is , and he was strong enough to from it soon. (recover)
6) The new-born baby was an to the family. “And it brings some
cost to the family.” the mother. (add)
7) Though Tom and John are not very , they can in sign language, which is a common method of between the blind. (communicate)
8) Though Shella tried her best to win the praise of the master on , she still failed it. She was so upset that she wandered in the street . (purpose)
9) As far as I’m , the accident is no of mine, but it my friend. (concern)
10) The two claimed to be born in , and that they knew no other language but . (German)
1.短语积累
add up把某物加起来
get sth done 让某事被做
calm down 安静下来；让某人安静下来
be concerned about 关心；担心
go through 经历；遭受；检查；讨论；被通过
set down 放下；记下；让某人下车
a series of 一系列
to do with 处理
on purpose 故意地；有目的地
at dusk 黄昏时
face to face 面对面
no longer 不再
take no notice of 不注意
suffer from 受某事之折磨
get tired of 对某事感到厌烦
have trouble with 做某事有麻烦
at the moment 目前；现在
get along with 与某人相处
fall in love with 爱上某人
make friends with 与某人交朋友
2. 从上面列举的短语中选择适当的，填入下面的空格中
1) When you these numbers, you will see how many points you have got.
2) Although he is 20 years old now, he still living alone. He even doesn’t know how to wash clothes.
3) Because he of what the teacher said, he didn’t know what he should do.
4) When John and his wife had some arguments, they would sit down together and discuss the problem .
5) Sorry. I didn’t mean to hurt you . I had wanted to throw at the dog.
6) Our parents us all the time while we children seldom take care of them.
7) He was too scared and didn’t know what the accident.
8) At the first sight the boy the pretty girl although he didn’t know whether she loved him.
9) You are a little baby. You must learn to look after yourself now.
10) I too much bad luck. I don’t care to have one more.
重要句型
1. But your friend can’t go until he/she finishes cleaning his/her bicycle.（P1）
not...until……句型：“直到……才”，主句动词一般需要用短暂性动词，如：finish, hand in, die, go, begin等等。
【词汇网络】not...until可以变化为更加地道的英语句型：
Not until...did/will sb do sth
It was/is not until...that sb did/will do sth
即时强化练习：
用not until翻译下列句子，每句至少用三种句式。
1）直到我去到百货商店我才发现没带钱包。
2）直到她的先生消失在她的视线范围之外，她才痛哭失声。
2. It /This/That is (was) the first/second/third/last time that...某人第一（二，三，最后等）次做某事
在此句型中，若主句时态是一般现在时，即用is，以that引导的定语从句常用现在完成时态。若主句时态是一般过去时，即用was，以that引导的定语从句常用过去完成时态。
This is the first time that I have ever enjoyed this kind of food.
这是我第一次吃这种食品。
It was the third time that he had been informed of the change of the meeting.
这是他第三次被告知会议作了改变。
即时强化练习：
翻译下列句子：オ
1) 那已经是我第五次离开家到广州去学习。
2) 这是我第一次有机会跟你们面对面地交流。
目标解读
1. Ignore the bell and go somewhere quiet to calm your friend down.(P1)
calm v. & adj.
1) vt.使平静，使镇静
The nurse calmed the little boy by giving him some candy.
保育员给那小男孩一些糖果，使他安静了下来。
He took a deep breath to calm himself.
他深吸了一口气以使自己平静下来。
2) vi.平静下来，镇静下来
The excited football fans calmed down at last.
激动的足球迷最终平静了下来。
3) adj. （心境）平静的，镇静的，沉着的; (天气)平静无风的；
（时代）和平安宁的
The sea was calm after the storm.
经过这场风暴后，大海平静下来了。
After the storm it became calm again.
暴风雨过后，天气又恢复了平静无风。
He was calm when I told him the bad news.
当我告诉他这个坏消息时，他很平静。
【词语辨析】calm, quiet, still与silent
calm平静的，沉着的。指无风浪的或人心情不激动的。
quiet平静的，安静的。指不吵闹的或心境不烦躁的。
still 静止的，不动的。指（人体等）不运动的。
silent 沉默的，缄口的，寂静的。指不讲话或没有声音的。
【拓展】calm down平静下来，镇定下来（既可作不及物动词短语也可作及物动词短语）
The crying child soon calmed down.
哭闹的小孩不一会就安静下来了。
It was difficult to calm down the football fans.
要使足球迷们平静下来是有困难的。
(注意：前例句的calm是不及物动词，后例句的calm是及物动词。)
2. Add up your score and see how many points you get.
add vt. & vi. 增加：添加；（数字等）加（起来）；补充说
Add more hot water, please. 请多加点热水。
If you add 4 to 3, you’ll get 7. 四加三得七。
Add up these figures, please. 请把这些数字加起来。
I should like to add that we are pleased with the test result.
【派生词】addition n. 增加，附加物；adder n. 「计」加法器
【词汇网络】与add 有关的词组：
add sth. to sth. 把……加到（进）……
add to(=increase)增加
add up to共计（无被动语态）；意味着，等于说
add sth. up/ together把……加起来，合计
3. Tell your friend that you concern about him/her.
concern v. & n.
1) vt. to have sth. to do with or relate to 涉及，关系到（一般不用于被动时态）This concerns the healthy growth of children deeply.
这事对孩子们的健康成长关系极大。
2) vt.使担心（挂念），使忧虑（常用于被动语态）
We’re rather concerned about father’s health.
我们相当担心父亲的健康。
3) n. 所关切的事，关心，担心，担忧
It’s no concern of mine. 这事与我无关。
His mother’s only concern was how to make him study even harder.
他妈妈心里想的全是如何使他学习更刻苦。
【词汇网络】有关concern 的短语还有：
with concern 关切地
show concern for sb. 对某人表示关心
have no concern for 毫不关心
as/so far as...be concerned 就……而言
of much concern 很重要，很有关系
of no concern 无关紧要，没有意义
it is no concern of mine/yours. 这不关我（你）的事。
be concerned about (for) 关心，挂念
We are all concerned for (about) her safety. 我们大家都担心着她的安全。
我们需要注意，在这里从中文角度考虑，应该是主动，但是英语中却必须用被动，类似这样常用被动来表示中文的主动意义的词组还有：
be associated with 与……联合、联系
be attached to 附加于、隶属于……
be based on 以……为基础
be composed of 由……
be connected with 与……连结、连接
be divorced from 和某人离婚
be educated from 从学校等毕业
be employed in 从事于……
be engaged to 和某人订婚
be exposed to 暴露于……，面临于……
be faced with 面对……
be fed up 吃得过饱，对……极其厌倦
be honored with／to瞓e（phr．） 被授予……；因做……而感到荣幸
be involved in 卷入、陷入……；专心于
be married to 和某人结婚
be prepared to do sth 准备好了去做某事
be rooted in 扎根于……
be set in 以……为背景
be used to＋v－ing（phr．）习惯于……
be hidden in 藏在某地
be dressed in 穿着
be seated 坐在
另外还有表示情感情绪的动词，当表示“感到……”时，用过去分词，这类动词有：amazed，amused, annoyed，astonished，concerned，confused，delighted，disappointed，discouraged, disgusted，distressed，excited，frightened，interested, irritated，moved，pleased, puzzled，relieved，shocked，touched。
4. It was the first time in a year and a half that I had seen the night face to face. (P2)face to face 面对面地，类似的“名词+介词+名词”的结构还有：
hand in hand，手牵手地 arm in arm 手挽手地，
side by side 肩并肩地 mouth to mouth 嘴对嘴地
back to back 背靠背地，背对背地，一个接一个，连续地；
see eye to eye 看法完全相同，完全同意，面对面看着(与see连用)；face to face 面对面地，当面地，对立地；
front to front 面对面地；
hand to hand 短兵相接地，逼近地，肉搏地；
head to head 头对头地，面对面地，促膝地，交头接耳地；
heart to heart 开诚布公地，心连心地，贴心地，推心置腹地，坦率地，诚恳地；knee to knee 膝靠着膝地，促膝地；
man to man 个人对个人地，一对一地，人盯人地，私下地，坦率地，真诚地；nose to nose 面对面地，迎面(相遇)；
shoulder to shoulder 肩并肩地，齐心协力地，互助，一致，团结；
5. I stayed awake on purpose. (P2)
stay vi. & link v.
1) vi. 停留；逗留
The doctor told him that he would have to stay in hospital for another two weeks. ひ缴告诉他，他还得在医院住两个星期。
2) link v.保持，持续不变 (=keep)
How can you stay so cool and calm after such a hot argument?
这样一场激烈的争论过后，你怎么还能保持如此冷静沉着呢？
【词汇网络】系动词的分类记忆：
“变化”类：become，turn, go, get, grow, fall, run, come
“感官”类：feel, smell, taste, look, sound
“显现”类：look, appear, seem
“状态”类：keep, stay, remain, stand, sit, prove
on purpose 故意地；有意地；有目的地
I don’t think he did it on purpose, for he is really a kind person.
我认为他不是故意这样做的，因为他真的是一个好人。
on 在这里表示处于某种状态或在某个方位，类似的短语还有：
on board 乘（车,飞机） on call 听候召唤
on duty 值班 on earth 到底
on fire 着火 on foot 步行
on guard 在岗 on hire 雇用
on holiday 度假 on leave 休假
on one餾 knees 跪下 on one’s way 在……的路上
on purpose 故意 on sale 待售
on shore 在岸上 on time 准时
on the move 行动 on the other hand 另一方面
on the spot 当- on the tip of one’s tongue 快要说出口 on top of 在……的顶部 on watch 值班
6. Make a list of reasons why friends are important to you. (P2)
reason n. & v.
1) n. 「C, U」原因，理由，动机，理性，理智
The reason why (that) she was ill was that she had eaten bad meat.
【提示】reason后的定语从句的引导词是关系副词why 或that，也可以省略。I have a good reason for doing that =I have a good reason to do that.
我那样做是有充分的理由的。
【提示】reason 后的定语常是介词短语for (doing) sth., 或不定式to do sth.
【词汇网络】①for this (that) reason 因为这个/那个原因
②by reason of由于，因为
2) vt. & vi.推理，推究，劝说
We reasoned that he was lying. 我们推断他在说谎。
Finally I reasoned him into /out of accepting the invitation.
最终我说服他接受（拒绝）邀请。
【词语辨析】reason 与cause
reason 侧重指做某事的理由；cause指导致不良后果的起因。
--What’s the reason for your absence?
你为什么缺席？
--The reason for it is that the traffic was heavy.
我缺席的原因是交通拥挤。
The cause of the big fire was his carelessness.
大火的起因是他的粗心大意。
【派生词】reasonable adj. 合情合理的；reasonably adv. 合情合理地；reasoned adj. 合乎逻辑的
其它 写出单词意思
add point upset ignore calm concern loose cheat reason list share feeling Netherlands German outdoors crazy nature purpose dare thunder entirely power according trust indoors suffer teenager advice questionnaire quiz situation editor communicate habit
add up calm down have got to be concerned about walk the dog go through hide away set down a series of on purpose
in order to face to face according to get along with fall in love
join in
1、add vt./vi
add up sth. =add sth. up 把…加起来add to sth. 增添、加某事物
add…to… 把…加到…里 add up to=amount to 共计，总计
① If you ____ 5_____3 you will get 8.
② This bad weather ________ our difficulties.
③ His whole school education _______________ no more than one year.
2、point n./v.
There is no point （in） doing sth. 做…没用，无意义
at/on the point of … 就要…的时候point at/to…指向… point sth. at/ towards sb./ th
① 我们正要离开这时你们来了。 We were __________________ leaving when you came.
② 我们赢（输）了5分。We won (lost) the game ____ 5 _________
③ Can you tell us the main _______ of the story?
④ “That’s the man who did it,” she said, ________________ me.
⑤ The robber _______a gun ________ the bank clerk.
3、concern vt./n.
be concerned about/for 关心 as concerns=concerning (prep.)关于
as/so far as…be concerned 就…而言 concerned adj. 有关的担心的
① 就英语而言，他是我们班最好的
_______________________________, he is first in our class.
② I am living in school, and mother _____________________me.
③ He doesn’t bother about things that don’t ____________ him.
④ Present at the meeting were leading members of the departments ____________.
⑤ This book deals with questions _________Anti-Japanese War.
4、share v/n
a) Let Tom play with your toys as well, Clare---you must learn to__
A. support B. care C. spare D. share
b) Culture refers to a group or community ___we share common experiences that shape the way we understand the world.
A. with which B. that C. which D. what
c) 我不得不与家里人共用一个浴室。I have to ___________ the bathroom _________ the rest of the family.
d) 他是唯一的一位与我的观点相同的人。 He is the only person who __________my opinion.
5、reason n.+ for/to do sth. for the reason of….
a) This is the reason ____he explained to me just now.
A. why B. which C. because D. about which
b) The reason _ he is late is _ there was a breakdown on the railway.
A. why; why B. because; that C. that; because D. why; that
c) Give your reason _____changing the plan.
6、go through sth.经历忍受或遭受…；被正式通过或接受;仔细检查；（书） 发行次数；用光或消耗…
get through 穿过；（使）通过；使（读）完;接通
a) Two months later, the law _________________.
b) I rang you several times but couldn’t ______________.
c) I have ____________ all my pockets but I can’t find my keys.
d) The dictionary has ____________________ ten editions.
e) When you _____________ with your work, let’s go out.
7、join ; join in ; take part in; attend
a) Will you ________ the lecture on science?
b) Would you like to _______ us ___ playing football?
c) After ____________ the League, he often helps others.
d) She ______________ the music competition.
e) We _______ a country club that year.
f) We’re going to visit the flower show tomorrow. Will you ____ us?
g) The boy ________ the English Evening and had a good time.
h) He didn’t _________ school yesterday because of his illness.
8、Put away the tools after work, will you? ________________
He puts away part of his wages each month. ________________
She put away the idea of going home. ________________
He put away his wife without good reasons. ________________
9、① --- Is it high time we ______ to school?
---Oh, it’s seven o’clock. Let’s go.
A. will go B. shall go C. went D. would go
② 这是她第一次跟英国人交谈
③每次我见到他，他总是在备课。
10、It is/was + 被强调部分+that/who+其他成分
a) It was 8 o’clock _____ I went back home last night.
A. that B. when C. which D. what
b) __________you missed such a fine lecture? A. How it was that B. It was how that C. How was it that D. Was it how that
c) I just wonder _______ that makes you so excited.
A. why it does B. what he does C. how it is D. what it is
d) It was not until she got home __ Mary realized she had lost her keys. A. that B. when C. where D. before
第二单元
词汇过关
1.重点单词拼写
1) I have got three days’holidays I New Year’s Day.
2) She’s busy at p and can’t speak to you.
3) The captain c his army to attack the enemy at night.
4) Don’t respond to any e-mails r personal information, no matter how official they look.
5) I r him as soon as he came in the room， though I hadn’t seen him for years.
6) The new g is made up of ten officials.
7) H difficult the task may be, we’ll fulfill it in time.
8) It is I to turn your back on someone who is speaking to you.
9) He was last seen heading in the d of Miami.
2. 重点词词形变换
1) Everybody laughed, the teacher . (include)
3) Do you like the films by Zhang Yimou?
He is a well-known Chinese . (direction)
4) The police only interview a child in the of an adult. (present)
5) We should study hard for the of China. (modern)
6) These are the world’s leading industrial . (native)
7) Dean’s a really person to have around when things go wrong.
Only Jack is of great at that time.(use)
8) The bag is -it has a hole in it. (use)
9) I’ve known Barbara for years， since we were babies, . (actual)
10) It was a period of population growth. (rapidly)
1. 短语积累
play a role / part in 在……中起作用
be based on 以……为依据
because of 因为
such as 例如，像……这样的
come up 走近
the number of …… 的数量
a large number of 许多
make good full use of 充分利用
2. 用所给短语将下列句子译成英语
1) 运气在他的成功中起了重要作用。(play an important part in)
2) 这出戏以真实故事为基础，很有教育意义。(be based on)
3) 约翰没有出席会议，因为他病了。(because of)
4) 充分利用你所拥有的每一个机会练习讲英语。(make good use of)
5) 今天缺席的学生有五人。(the number of)
重要句型
1.... than ever before 比以往任何时候
即时强化练习：
翻译下列句子：
1) 受到老师激励，我比以往任何暑假都要更加努力工作。
2) 今年的冬天比以往任何时候都冷。オ
2. This is because ……这是因为……
翻译下列句子：
1) 他今天没有来上学，这是因为他病了。
2) 我不要求你按时完成, 这是因为我不想给你太大压力。
3. even if / even though... 即使，尽管
即时强化练习：
翻译下面句子：
1) 即使你不喜欢他，也可客气一点。
2) 即使你不想去，你也应该告诉他一声。
目标解读
1. They are called world Englishes and they include Canadian, British, American and Indian English. （P9）
include vt. 包括，包含
The bill includes tax and service. 账单中包含了税金和服务费。
Your duties include checking the letters and sorting them out.
Ten students took part in the competition, including three girls.
Ten scientists, six women scientists included, were present at the meeting.
【重要提示】including一般位于名词或代词的前面，included则位于名词或代词的后面
【词语辨析】include / contain / hold
include 强调“包括，作为整体的一部分”，侧重范围或整体。
contain 着重“其中包含有”，指在一定范围或容器内容纳某物，侧重包含的内容或成分。
hold 指“能容纳”
The bok contains ten chapters, including American Literature.
This kind of fruit contains lots of vitamin C and B.
这种水果富含维生素C和B。
The hall holds 200 people. 这个大厅能容纳200人。
2. World Englishes come from those countries where English plays an important role as a first or second language, either because of foreign rule or because of its special role as an international language.（P9）
because of 是复合介词，表原因，意为“因为”，后接名词、代词、或宾语从句。because 作连词，后跟句子。以原因状语从句形式表明主句的根本原因。
He was late not only because of his illness but also because he missed the train.
【词汇网络】表示“由于”的短语还有：
thanks to “多亏，由于”，只能作状语
Thanks to your advice, much trouble was saved.
due to 可以作表语，状语，不可位于句首
The accident was due to the storm.
owing to 可以作状语或表语，作状语时常用逗号隔开，作表语相当于due to.
Tom’s failing in the exam was owing to his carelessness
Owing to his careless driving, the accident occurred.
as a result of “由于”，作状语
on account of “因为”，作状语
. Would you please come up to my flat for a visit?(P9)
come up 上来，过来；
A child came up to me and showed me the way to the station. (走近，上来)
The sky was dark blue and clear when the moon came up. (升起)
Your question came up at the meeting. (被提出讨论)
【词汇网络】come up with 想出（计划，答案）
come out 出来，（花）开，出版；结果是
come about 发生
come across 偶然遇见
come along 一起来，一道走；进展；进步
come to 共计，达到
. English is also spoken in many other countries in Africa and Asia, such as South Africa, Singapore and Malaysia.(P10)
【词语辨析】such as, for example
such as 意为“例如，诸如……之类的”，用来列举同类人或事物中的几个。如果要把同类人或事物全部列举出来，用that is或namely。
A lot of things can be recycled, such as waste paper, waste plastic bags, and old batteries.
for example举例说明，列举同类人或事物中的“一个”，作插入语，且用逗号隔开，可位于句首、句中或句末。
Most boys in my class like physics. Tom, for example, shows a special interest in it.
5. Believe it or not, there is no such thing as standard English.(P13)
such与all, no, some, any, few, little, many, much, several, one等词连用时，应位于它们的后面。
There is no such thing as a free lunch.
世上没有免费午餐之类的好事儿。T
here are three such mistakes in your composition.
你的作文中有三个这样的错误。
6. Today the number of people learning English in China is increasing rapidly.(P10)
the number of...表示“……的数量”
a large number of 相当于a good / great many或many，表示“许多的，大量的”其后跟可数名词的复数形式，不可跟不可数名词。如：
The number of trees on the deserted mountain is over 200,000.
在那片荒山上种植的树木数量已超过二十万棵。
A great many (A number of) visitors come to the Palace Museum every year.
每年有大量的游客故宫参观。
其它 写出单词意思
elevator, petrol, gas, official, because of, native, apartment, actually, be based on, at present, gradually, Danish, vocabulary, make use of, spelling, fluent, fluently, Singapore, Malaysia, such as, frequent, frequently, usage, African, Spanish, play a part, recognize, accent
be different from, pay a role(part) in, because of, either …or…, in/on a team, the number of/a number of, than ever before, even if, comp up to, over time, communicate with, be based on, make use of, have one’s own identity, such as, Only time can tell, native speaker, as well as, solve a problem, believe it or not, no such a…, all over the world, at the top(bottom) of, pen friends, to this day, sum up, Pardon?, beg your pardon, go abroad, be used for, more of a …, encourage sb. to do sth., work on, feel like sth., from time to time, English-speaking countries, from one…to another, do business, on the air, would like sb. to do, make notes, fight against, keep…a secret, even though, save time(money), a form of…
1. recognize be recognized as 被承认为 recognize sb. to be 承认某人是…
① --- oh, it’s you! I ______ ________ you. ----- I’ve just had my hair cut, and I’m wearing new glasses.
② Though they hadn’t met for many years，they ______ each other at first sight.
③ Lincoln is recognized ____ one of the greatest presidents in America.
2. direction
in all directions 朝四面八方 under the direction of sb = under one’s direction 在某人的指导下 in the direction of 朝着…方向 from the direction of 从…方向 follow/ obey /listen to one’s direction 听从某人的指导
①． The diretion ____ which the president would go was kept secret ____ safety concern.
A.for; over B. from; about C. in; for D. at; as
②． Generally speaking, when ____ according to the directions, the drug has no side effect.
A. taking B. taken C. to take D. to be taken
③. she ______ (问了方向) and then tells her friends.
④. Tom went off _____ ______ _______ and Harry in another.
⑤. He did the work ____ _____ _______.(在我的指导下)
3．Command
Command sb to do sth 命令（要求）某人做某事 have a good command of … 对…精通
Command that … (should) + 动词原型
He commanded that all the gates __________.
A. should shut B. would be shut C. shut D. be shut
4． Request
Request sth of/ from sb. 向某人请求某物 request sb to do sth 请求某人做某事 at one’s request 应某人之请求 request that … (should) + 动词原型
①．Visitors ____ not to touch the exhibits.
A. will request B. request C. are requesting D. are requested
②. The old pianist wouldn’t listen to our repeated request that he ____ in public again.
A. play B. played C. would play D. was going to play
③. He came here ____ A.at my request B. by me request C. by the request of me D. for my request
5. contain, include, cover 区别：
Contain 整体包括部分 A contains B A与B 是不同类事物 或者一个容器中容纳的东西
Include A includes B A与B是同类事物，常用两种表达方式：including sth/ sb= sb’sth included
Cover 钱够...之用；足以支付
①．---- How come a simple meal like this costs so much?
-----We have ____ in your bill the cost of the cup you broke just now.
A. added B. included C. contained D. charged
② We all went, ______ Mary.= We all went, Mary _______.
③ ----- Will $200 ____ the cost of the damage? ----- I’m afraid not. I need at least 100 more.
④ He was worried, because he lost his bag ______ his passport, ID card and a lot of money.
6. present
at present= at the present time 目前；现在 be present at the meeting 出席会议 present sth to sb 把...赠给某人 present sb with sth 赠给某人某物
①All the people _____ at the party were his supporters.
A. present B. thankful C. interested D. important
②. They ______ a sum of money ____ (赠与) the college in memory of their son.
7. more A than B (A/B: adj.原级/n.) 与其说B不如说A
no more than + num. = only 仅仅
①．More than one ___ the people heart and soul.
A. officials has served B. officials have served C. officials has served for D. officials have served for
②.---- Tom is very stupid. He failed to pass the exam once again. ----- He is ____ than stupid.
A. lazier B. no lazier C. more lazy D. lazier rather
8Come up 上升；上来；被提出 come up with （人）找到或提出（答案或方法等）
Come about 发生 come up to 达到 come across （偶然）遇见；碰到
用come有关短语填空：
①. Would you _________ my flat for a visit?
②. The question _______ at the meeting whether we had enough money.
③. She ____________ new idea for increasing sales.
④. I ________ children sleeping under bridges.
⑤. Can you tell me how the accident _________?
9. because of/ due to（不可放于句首）/ thanks to/ owing to 由于 + n./ pron. /动名词/名词性短语
because + 句子 as a result of 因为...的结果 result in 导致 result from 由...导致 填空：
① I didn’t attend the meeting, _________ I was ill.
② He is absent _________ his illness
③ He was ill, __________, he didn’t attend the meeting.
④ His illness ____________ his absence from the meeting.
⑤ His absence from the meeting _______________ his illness.
10. make use of/ make good use of/ make full use of
①If better use ___________ of your spare time, you will make great progress in it.
②she wondered uneasily what use she would ______ ___ this opportunity.
11. the same... as 表示同类的事物 the same ... that 表示同一个事物 the same ... which/ who/ when /where 和...相同的...
①.This pen is not very good; I’d like the same one ______ you are using now.
②.He went back to the same place ______ he had found the ring.
③.The explorer took only such men and things ______ he really needed into the thick forest.
④.I’m lucky enough to find the same knife _____ I lost yesterday.
12. 用because/ why/ that 填空：
① She didn’t study hard. That was _______ she failed in he exam.
② she failed in the exam. That was ________ she didn’t study hard.
③ What caused the accident was _____ the bus was driven too carelessly.
④ The reason _______ he hasn’t come is that he has to send his mother to the hospital.
⑤That is _____ she left her hometown at the age of nine.
第三单元
词汇过关
1.重点单词拼写
1) His paper will be published in the British Medical J next month.
2) We can’t goods in railways.
3) I knew you would be too s to listen to my advice.
4) I I that you go to the hospital immediately; you are very ill.
5) Are you doing the task in the p way?
6) The size of your feet d the size of your shoes.
7) What is you’re a to the idea, agree or disagree?
8) He has a gift for language, and he is f with three languages.
9) He broke the r in high jump in the Asian Games.
10) I was very busy that day, but he p me to take part in the party.
2. 重点词词形变换
1) The of live animals is forbidden. (transport)
2) They scored in the minute of the game. (finally)
3) After a little gentle , Mr.Brown agreed to let us in.(persuade)
4) Her to do well made her keep on studying. (determine)
5) The are all from China. (cycle)
6) The woman showed great in going into the burning building to rescue the trapped child. (brave)
7) The events have been the of conversation for weeks. (topic)
8) The young lady wanted to buy a pair of tennis . (short)
9) Make sure the job is done .(proper)
10) The tourists were caught in the snowstorm in the area. (Tibet)
1.短语积累
keep a travel journal 写旅游日记
see the world through one’s eyes 透过眼睛看世界
agree to sth 同意
on the/one’s journey 在旅途中
as usual 照例；像往常一样
stay awake 保持清醒
keep asking sb. 不断问
one way fare 单程票
at an altitude of 5,000 meters 在海拔5000米的地方
dream about/ of (doing) sth. 梦想做……
graduate from college 大学毕业
persuade sb. to do sth. 劝说某人做某事
get sb.interested in doing sth. 使……对……感兴趣
care about 关心;考虑
a determined look 坚决的表情
change one’s mind / change one’s attitude
change our minds 改变想法
make up one’s mind
make up our minds 决定
give in 投降; 上交
give in to sb. / sth. 屈服；同意……
pass through 穿过
flow through 流经……
make camp 扎营
put up the tent 支帐篷
for one thing,... for another,... 一方面……另一方面……
familiar to sb. 为……所熟悉
in detail 详细地
2. 从上面列举的短语中选择适当的，填入下面的空格中
1) She being famous one day.
2) The only thing he seems to is money.
3) O’Neil was to pressure from London to hurry the reform.
4) How can we him politics?
5) Kate didn’t want to buy that skirt., it was very expensive;
its style was out of fashion.
重要句型
1. It was my sister who first had the idea to cycle along the Mekong River from where it begins to where it ends.(P18)
此句包含英语中的强调句型：it + is/was + 被强调部分 + that/who + 原句其余部分。要注意：被强调部分表示“人”的话，用that/who, 其他情况下都用that.
It was Jack who/that broke the window yesterday.
即时强化练习:
用强调句型翻译下面句子
1) 我是在那棵树下面捡到这只钱包的。
2) 是他把窗户的玻璃打破的吗？
3) 你是因为什么而没有参加会议的？
2. Are you working this evening?(P21)
此句用现在进行时 are working 来表示按计划进行的将来的动作。
I’m writng the composition at night.お
即时强化练习：
翻译下面句子
今天下午一位美国来宾将在礼堂举行一场英语讲座。
目标解读
1. I have dreamed about taking a great bike trip.(P18)
dream about: 做梦；梦见
I dreamt about you last night.
dream of/about: 梦想，幻想
We dream of buying our own house.
【词汇网络】dream away 虚度（光阴）
dream up 虚构出
have a dream 做梦
2. When we graduated from college, we finally got the chance to do it.(P18)
graduate from : (大学或中学)毕业
Wang Ming graduated from Beijing University with a degree in law.
finally: adv. 最后，终于
final: adj. 最后的，决定性的 n.决赛
【词语辨析】finally, at last, in the end，eventually
finally: 可以表示时间位置，相当于at last / in the end; 还可以表示时间的先后顺序，如同first(ly), second(ly), then, last。
at last: 只指时间位置，强调经过周折、等待、耽误的“最后、终于”出现所期待的结果。
in the end / eventually: 只指时间位置，强调经过周折、等待、耽误的“最后、终于”出现所期待的结果（相当于at last）或者出现非期待的结果。
3. Then she persuaded me to buy one.(P18)
persuade: vt. 说服; 信服
persuasion: n. 说服
persuasive: adj. 有说服力的
persuade sb. to do sth/ into doing sth. 说服某人干某事
persuade sb. not to do sth/ out of doing sth 说服某人别干某事
persuade sb. of sth. 使某人信服
I finally managed to persuade Mary to go out for a drink with me.
Don’t let yourself be persuaded into buying things you don’t really want.
He persuaded me not to go there. / He persuaded me out of going there.
We finally persuaded Ben of the wisdom of this decision.
4....she insisted that we find the source of the river and begin our journey. (P18)
insist: v. 坚持宣称/认为（宾语从句的谓语用陈述语气）；
坚决要求，一定要（宾语从句的谓语用虚拟语气should + v.）
Mike insisted that he was right.
They insisted that everyone (should) come to the party.
【词汇网络】insist on （doing）sth. 坚持
if you insist 如果你一定要这样
Her parents insisted on speaking to the headmistress.
He kept insisting on her innocence.
--Why don’t you call them up today?
--Oh, if you insist
【词语辨析】insist on, stick to
前者表对“要求、意见、看法等”的“坚持”；后者表对“愿望、原则、决定、诺言或某种理论”的“坚持”
5. She gave me a determined look-the kind that said she wouldn’t change her mind. (P18）
1) determine: v. 确定；决定，支配；（官方）确定，规定
determination: n. 决心，（官方）决定
determined: adj.
determine to do sth. 决定做.……
be determined to do sth.有决心干……
We determined to leave at once.
I am determined to find out who is responsible for this.
Determined that his son would do well, Mr.Smith sent him to a private school.
2) change one’s mind（about）改变主意/决定
Try and get her to change her mind about coming with us.
【词汇网络】make up one’s mind (to do sth.) 下定决心做……
be in two minds about 拿不定主意，犹豫不决
set one’s mind on (doing) sth. 下定决心要┳觥…
come to mind 突然想到
put one’s mind to 专心于……
keep one’s mind on 专心于……
keep / bear sth. in mind 记住……
bring / call sth. to mind 回想起……
其它 写出单词意思
journal, fare, transport, prefer, disadvantage, fare, flow, cycle, persuade, graduate, finally, schedule, fond , be fond of , shortcoming , stubborn, care about , make up one’s mind , determine, give in , valley, pace, altitude, bend, boil , forecast, parcel, reliable, organize, journey, insurance, wool, as usual, view , pillow, midnight, at midnight, flame, beneath, temple, cave, change one’s mind,
1 imagine
imagine +v-ing
我难以想象我与那种女子结婚后的情形。
I can’t ______ my ______ a girl of that sort。
2 choose （chose ，chosen）
have no choice but to do sth 除了干某事别无选择
She had no choice but ______away 。
A go B to go C going D to have go
3 persuade
Persuade sb to do=persuade sb into doing 说服某人做某事；
persuade sb not to do=persuade sb out of sth/doing 说服某人不要做某事；
Persuade sb of sth =persuade sb 。+that 从句 使某人相信；
① While shopping ，people sometimes can’t help ______ into buying sth。 They don’t really need。
A to persuade B persuading C being persuaded D be persuaded
② Alice trusts you，only you can ______her to give up the foolish idea 。
A suggest B attract C attempt D persuade
③猎人劝阻我们不要独自穿越茂密的丛林。
The hunter ______us ______through the thick forest alone 。
4 insist
Insist 表达“坚持主张”时，所跟的宾语从句使用虚拟语气；表达“坚持一种说法，看法或事实”时，宾语从句使用陈述语序和相应的时态。
① I insisted that a doctor ______ immediately。
A has been sent for B sends for C will be sent for D be sent for
② He came to my class every week ，but his attitude ______that he was not really interested。
A expresses B described C explained D suggested
5 determine
Determine + n。/determine to do/ determine +从句
Be determined to do 决心做
determined a。 已下决心的（不在名词前）；断然的，决然的
①______ to train his daughter in English， he put an ad like this in the paper。“______ ，an English teacher for a ten-year-old girl ，”
A Determined ，Wanted B Determined ，Wanting C Determine ，Wanted D Determining ，Wanting
②她坚定不移要上大学。
She ______ ______ ______ go to university。
6 fun Make fun of 取笑 for fun 为了高兴，为了好玩
①______ at the seaside ！
A How fun the children had B What a fun the children had C How fun had the children D What fun the children had
② 独自一个人去参加聚会没什么意思。
It‘s not much ______going to a party alone
7 awake
①When do you usually ______ up？
② I s he ______or asleep？
③ He lay ______ all night。
④ They were making enough noise to ______ the dead 。
8 give in屈服投降让步
give away不小心透露，赠送，免费给予 give off 放出，散发（光，热，烟，气，味）give up 放弃，认输 give out vt。分配，分发 Vi。（食物，燃料，电力） 用光，精疲力竭
① Never ______ ______ the stugy of English
② Jane tried to keep up a calm appearance ，but her trembling voice ______her ______
③ He may ______to my view
④ It is always the husband who ______ first when quarrel breaks out between the young couple 。
⑤ Her patiece finally ______ ______
⑥ The teacher ______ ______ the exam paper 。
9 for one thing 。。。for another （thing）/besides； on （the ） one hand ，on the other （hand）
for one thing 首先。。。一则。。。，陈述两方面的情况常一致，常与for another （thing）/besides（再者，另一方面）呼应； on （the ） one hand ，on the other （hand）常表达相矛盾的两方面
①______ she‘s well eduacated ，______ she is pretty 。
A On the one hand ，on the other hand B for one thing ，for another
C On one hand ，but also D On the one hand ，on another hand
②Tom works very hard。His brother ，______，does‘t do much at all。
A what‘s more B on the contrary C for one thing D for another
③ ______ ， the hotel is near the sea，but ______it costs a lot。
A On the one hand ，on the other hand B for one thing ，for another
C On one hand ，but also D On the one hand ，on another hand
10 care about 关心，对。。感兴趣；在乎
care for 喜欢，愿意，照顾
① I don‘t ______ what others think
② She doesn‘t ______ skating 。
③ I wonder whether they will ______ us all to go there
④ The captain ______ the safety of the crew。
11 用 cost spend pay take 填空
①It ______ us two hours to finish the work。
② Tom ______a lot of money on books。
③ The new bicycle ______ him 100 dollars
④ Mary ______ 200 dollars for the evening dress
⑤ I‘m ______much more time in listening now
⑥ The money I ______ for the service added up to1000dollars every year 。
⑦ It will ______ you 5dollars to fly to London
⑧ The car ______all his savings
⑨ The man got what he wanted ，which is at a ______of his own life and his family‘s happiness。
第四单元
词汇过关
1.重点单词拼写
1) Before the earthquake, you can notice that the wells have c in them.
2) Before the earthquake the chickens and even the pigs are too n to eat.
3) Two-thirds of the people died or were （受伤）during the earthquake.
4) Older students were having difficulty in studying and o themselves.
5) A great part of the city was d in the earthquake.
6) I felt everything s during the earthquake so I couldn’t sit still.
7) She c her face in her hands and cried loudly.
8) Seeing a baby crying in the burning house, the firemen r her from the house.
9) She is always healthy. Whenever I see her, she looks f .
10) J from his appearance, the manager can’t be over 60.
2. 重点词词形变换
1) Whether the can be separated is not an international affair, but a one. It is up to the people to decide. (nation)
2) Please wipe the off the table. The room looks with
the table. (dirt)
3) Most people protect themselves fromto their self-esteem, for they think if their self-esteem wasgreatly, they will feel. (injure)
4) from the result, the of the match must have controlled the match quite well. Do you agree with my ? (judge)
5) can be found everywhere. Sometimes one’s hair seems . Some equipment can be . (electricity)
6) As , some were wounded when they were trying to find out something of the government .(report)
7) We visited the of Yuanmingyuan last summer. It by the foreign invaders. Seeing the palace we feel very pitiful. (ruin)
8) Taste and are closely connected. If you can’t the food, you can’t taste it either. (smell)
9) The felt happy that they were able to the accident and joked that it was because of the of the fittest. (survive)
10) We all felt to be invited to take the action and we promised on our that we would do it bravely, even if we died . (honour)
1.短语积累
shake hands with 握手
as usual 像往常一样
break out 爆发
right away 马上；即刻
a number of 许多；大量
to the north of 在……北面
put up 举起；张贴
be proud of 对……感到自豪/骄傲
judging from 根据……判断
be known as 作为……而出名
come out of 从……出来
too...to... 太……而不
give out 用完；出故障；分发；宣布
be trapped under the ruins 陷在废墟下
instead of 代替
in honour of 纪念
tens of thousands of 几万
more than 超过；不仅仅
fall down 倒下
at an end 结束；终结
dig out 挖出；查明
wake up 醒来
in ruins 严重受损；破败不堪
2. 从上面列举的短语中选择适当的，填入下面的空格中
1) A terrible earthquake hit the city and in a few seconds the whole city lay .
2) It’s a custom others when they meet in China, while in Japan they bow to each other.
3) following his father’s advice, Jack did just the opposite, which made his father angry.
4) from his expression, he must have won a prize.
5) The whole class the boy student who won the first prize in the English Contest, for he was the honor to their class.
6) The children were busy a tent and it would be completed before dark.
7) Meizhou the Capital of Hakaees, for there are most Hakaees living there.
8) The monument (纪念碑) was set up those who died in the terrible disaster.
9) The monitor helped the teacher the graded test papers.
10) The terrible shaking of the building all the people who were sleeping.
重要句型
1. What do you think may happen before an earthquake? (P25)
疑问词 + do you think/suppose + 陈述句语序的句子？
When do you think he will arrive here?
你认为他什么时候能到这里？
シ译下列句子：
1) 你认为是谁拿走了我的雨伞？
2) 你想我们什么时候来制定计划？オ
2. It seemed that the world was at an end! 似乎是世界末日！（P26）
It seems/appears/happens + that从句 “似乎/碰巧……”
=Sb/sth seem/appear/happen+to do sth 某人似乎/碰巧要做某事。
Sb/sth seem/appear/happen+to be doing sth 某人似乎/碰巧在做某事。
Sb/sth seem/appear/happen+to have done sth 某人似乎/碰巧做过某事。
It seems that we will have a hard time. = We seem to have a hard time.
似乎我们将要过一段艰难的时光。
翻译下列句子：
1) 似乎他从未思考过这样的问题。
2) 碰巧当时大家都在室外干活。
目标解读
1. For three days the water in the village wells rose and fell, rose and fell. (P26)
rise：
1) vi. 上升
The sun rises in the east and sets down in the west.
起立；起床
Knowing that she wouldn’t help, he rose and set off for home.
知道她不帮忙，他站起来回家了。
增长
The cost in supporting a family is rising quickly recently.
维持一个家庭的费用近来迅速地增加。
2）n. 上升；上涨；升起
a rise in price 价格的上涨
give sb. a rise 给某人提工资
at the rise of the sun 日出之时
【词语辨析】rise与raise
(1) 两者都可表示“升起”之意，这时rise是不及物动词，而raise是及物动词。The price of meat has risen sharply lately.
最近肉价上涨很快。
The butchers will raise the price of meat in a few weeks.
肉商几个星期内将提高肉价。
(2) 表示“起立、起床、增长”时只能用rise。
Although very tired, when hearing the alarm, he rose from the bed quickly.
虽然很累，当听到闹钟响起时，他迅速地从床上爬起来。
(3) 表示“饲养、提出”时要用raise。
He is just the person who raised such a good plan.
正是他提出了这么好的计划。
2. Two thirds of the people died or were injured during the earthquake. (P26)
injure 受伤；伤害
He was badly/seriously injured in the accident.
他在事故中严重受伤。
Drinking too much surely will injure one’s health.
喝太多酒当然会伤害到一个人的健康。
injured adj. 受伤的
injury n.伤口；受伤处
【词语辨析】injure: 受伤
wound: 受伤（一般强调外伤）
harm: 意指无形的伤害，“对……有害”
hurt: （肉体或精神上的）伤害，强调疼痛
Don’t often listen to the loud music. It will harm your hearing.
In the modern war, not many soldiers were wounded or killed.
Your words really hurt him a lot.
He fell from the second floor and was badly injured /hurt.
3. In the farm yards, the chickens and even the pigs were too nervous to eat. (P26)
too...to... 太……以至不能……。例如：
The boy is too weak to lift the heavy box．
这男孩太虚弱，举不起那个重箱子。
当too...to...跟少数形容词（如ready,glad,pleased,apt,willing,inclined，eager, easy, satisfied等）搭配时，不定式无否定意义。例如：
He is too ready to promise．他轻于许诺。
Beginners are too apt to make mistakes．初学者极易出错。
He is too much inclined to give himself airs．
他太喜欢装模作样了。
需要注意的是，too... to... 的否定形式not too... to... 的意思是“不是太……而不能”。 例如：
He is not too young to dress himself．
他不是小得连衣服都不会穿。
It is never too late to learn．活到老，学到老。
too还因此形成一类特殊而重要的用法，具体如下：
cannot（或can never）... too... 表示“怎么……也不会过分”、“越……越好”的含义。如：
One can never be too careful in one’s work．工作越细越好。
One cannot be too careful in making the decision as it was such a critical case．
因为这是一个如此重要的问题，所以在做出决定时无论怎样谨慎都不过分。 You cannot praise the play too highly．
这出戏你无论怎样称赞都不会过分。
4. But one million people of the city, who thought little of these events, went to bed as usual that night. (P26)
think little of 不重视；认为没价值
It is wrong to think little of everything. 对什么都不在乎是不对的。
She thought little of my work. 她不看重我的工作。
【词汇网络】类似词组：
think much of 认为某人很重要
think better of sb. 对某人印象好；看重某人
think better of sth. 改变……念头；打消主意
think highly of 看重；器重
think well of 重视
think little of 看轻；看不起
think poorly of 不放在眼里；轻视
think nothing of 轻视；认为无所谓；认为没什么了不起
as usual 照例；和平常或习惯一样：
As usual, I slept late that Saturday morning.
和平时一样，那个星期六早晨我起得很迟
5.Sand now filled the wells instead of water. (P26)
instead adv
1) 替代；更换
If you cannot go, let him go instead.
如果你不能去，让他替你去。
2) （与of连用）代替
We’ll have tea in the garden instead of in the house.
我们将改在花园喝茶，而不在屋里喝。
6. Describe your feelings about the city, which is known as the “Brave City of China”. (P29)
1) be known as +身份
2) be known for... 因……出名
The area is known as a green tea producing places.
这个地方是以绿茶生产地而闻名的。
The town is known for its fine park.
这个小镇以它精致漂亮的公园而闻名。
3) be known by 根……而得知
A person is known by the company he keeps.
根据他经营的公司可知道他这个人。
4) be known to 被某人所了解
It is known to all that theory comes from practice.
大家都知道理论来自实践。
7. One other thing to remember. (P31)
one other :应该注意限定词顺序,
“限定词”包括：冠词、物主代词、指示代词、或数词，它位于各类形容词前。它本身分为三位，即：前、中、后。前位限定词有all、half、both、分数和倍数；中位限定词有冠词、指示代词、物主代词等；后位限定词有基数词和序数词，但序数词位于基数词前。如:both my hands、all half his income等。
8. An outline will prepare you to write a better story. (P31)
prepare
1) prepare “准备；预备；筹备；制作；配制”
①prepare + 名词或代词。例如：
He has prepared his lessons. 他已备好课了。
②prepare + 双宾语（间接宾语和直接宾语）。例如：
The secretary has prepared the president a long report.
= The secretary has prepared a long report for the president.
秘书已为董事长准备好了一份长篇报告稿。
③prepare + 动词不定式短语。例如：
They are busy preparing to go on vacation.
他们正忙着准备去度假。
④prepare + for （或 against ）引起的短语。例如：
The students are busy preparing for the mid-term examination.
学生们正忙于为期中考试作准备。
The peasants are preparing against the drought.
农民们正在为抗干旱作准备。
2) prepare“使（人）作好准备；叫（人）作准备”：
①prepare + sb/oneself + for sth.例如：
He was preparing himself for the marathon race then.
他当时正在为参加马拉松比赛而作准备。
②prepare + sb/oneself + 动词不定式短语。例如：
He prepared himself to take out a license for a driver.
他为取得汽车驾驶执照作了准备。
3) 过去分词 prepared 用于系表结构，意思为“为……做好准备；打算”：
①be prepared + for （或 against ）引起的短语。例如：
They were prepared for the worst.
他们已准备好应付最坏的情况。
② be prepared + 不定式短语。例如：
I am not prepared to listen to all your weak excuses.
我不愿听你那些不成借口的借口。
其它 写出单词意思
earthquake, quake, right away, well (n.) , million , event , pipe, burst, as if, at an end , nation , canal, steam, dirt, ruin, in ruins , suffering, extreme, injure, destroy, brick, dam, track, useless, steel, shock, rescue, trap, electricity, disaster, dig out, bury, mine, miner, shelter, a (great ) number of , title, reporter, bar, damage, frighten, frightened, frightening, congratulation, judge, sincerely, express, outline, headline, cyclist
shake,well,rise,smelly,pond,pipe,burst,canal,steam,ruin,injure,destroy,brick,dam,useless,steel,shock,quake,rescue,electricity,disaster,army,organize,bury,coal,mine,shelter,fresh,percent,speech,judge,honor,prepare,Europe.crack, survivor, miner
right away, at an end, dig out, give out, thousands of
重点句子
1. Farmers’ wives noticed that the well walls had deep cracks in them.
2. It seemed as if the world was at an end!
3. Bricks covered the ground like red autumn leaves.
4. The army organized teams to dig out those who were trapped and to bury the dead.
5. Workers built shelters for survivors whose homes had been destroyed.
shake, rise, crack, burst, well, smelly, pond, steam, destroy, ruin, injure, survivor, brick, useless, shock, quake, rescue, electricity,
disaster, organize, bury, coal, mine, shelter, fresh, percent, honor, prepare.
② 短语：right away, at an end, lie in ruins, be trapped under sth, to the north of sp, put up, give out, wake sb up, prepare sth for sth., think little of sth.
选词填空
dream of , make up one’s mind, change one’s mind,
give in, give up, insist on, stick to, determine to
John is a mountaineering-lover, who has _________conquering the Alps, a mountain with an altitude of 4804 meters since he was a middle school student. However, his mother thought that mountaineering was such a dangerous sport that she always tried to persuade him to _________. It is his deep love for climbing that made him __________ realizing his dream.
One day, John got the chance to climb the Alps. His friends __________ form a team to pay a visit to the Alps and of course John joined them happily. In order to do the trip properly, they examined every detail. Feeling his son’s great determination, John’s mother knew that he would not_____________. Finally, John and his friends succeeded in conquering the Alps.
第5单元
词汇过关
1.重点单词拼写
1) We should pay more attention to the q as well as the quantity.
2) He is always w to help anyone who is in t .
3) Whatever difficulty you meet, I hope you will never lose h .
4) Everything needs to be done according to a certain (原则,原理)
5) People in Iraq are dreaming of living a p life, that is they hope to live in p .
6) The thief was caught and was s in p for 3 years.
7) During the p when I was in my university, I studied l myself and became a l after graduation.
8) The final examination is coming. Our teacher a us to go over
our lessons carefully.
9) If it c to rain for some days, the crops would be destroyed.
10) If he gets that (职位），I think he can do it well.
11) He received a sum of money, but he didn’t want to a it.
12) They don’t want to solve the problem with v . Instead, they hope to solve it in a peaceful way.
13) In some countries, especially in some poor countries, women are not
really e to men.
14) If you feel cold while sleeping, you can add a b on your quilt.
15) As a well-e person, it’s hard for us to imagine that she treat the boy with such (残忍).
2. 重点词词形变换
1) The pupils got to know that Liu Hulan was a and died and they were moved by her deeds. (hero)
2) They were so that they cut the man into pieces . We all felt sure that they would be punished by their . (cruel)
3) He is really a man with many , but do you think you are
enough to do the work? (quality)
4) Let him do what he . He is not to do that if it is against his . (will)
5) pay for work. That’s our rule. If we can’t treat every client , we will break the in our company. (equal)
6) We all enjoy the of the countryside, for we can live with the nature and live a life there. (peace)
7) You are not allowed to commit any , or you will become
a and be sentenced to prison for the act. (crime)
8) The big waves beat the coast . The wind blew with great , which caused a storm. (violence)
9) If this proposal is to you, you must it. In this way the proposal will meet with general . (accept)
10) She is always having the of snakes. She finds it to come across a snake, which will her very much. (terror)
1.短语积累
put...into prison 把……投进监狱
in fact, as a matter of fact事实上
fight against 与……作斗争
come to power 上台执政
break the law 违反法律
without pay 没有报酬
lose heart 灰心；泄气
be active in 积极参加；活跃
be willing to do something 愿意做某事
be out of work 失业
be stopped from doing something 被阻止做某事
answer violence with violence 以暴制暴
be in good health 健康良好お
blow up 发脾气；爆炸
ask for 索-
be in trouble 处于麻烦中
die for 为……而死
advise somebody to do something 建议某人干某事
in reward for 作为……的回报
set up 建立
be sentenced to 被判处……
worry about 为……担心
be free from 免去……之苦
2. 从上面列举的短语中选择适当的，填入下面的空格中
1) Whatever great difficulty we meet, we’ll never .
2) If you can’t finish the work on time, you’ll be .
3) Your parents are you: do make a phone call to them.
4) She has been for a year and is looking forward to being in work again.
5) People expect to pollution and live in a pleasant environment.
6) -- I thought you wouldn’t mind.
--Well, I don’t; but you should have asked me first.
7) Several people were killed and many were hurt when a bomb at the busy street.
8) As soon as he arrived in Paris, he for the wrongs his family had done.
9) As a Jew, Einstein was forced to leave his homeland after Hitler .
10) The government has a working party to look into the problem of drug abuse.
11) He death because of killing someone on purpose.
12) The women workers should the men in pay since they do the same work.
重要句型
1. The last thirty years have seen the greatest number of laws stopping our rights and progress. (P34)
拟人用法：时间、地点 + see/eyewitness + 事件。
1949 eyewitnessed the foundation of the People’s Republic of China.お
即时强化练习：
翻译下列句子：
1) 我们学校是1993年成立的。
2) 在这个村庄曾经发生过一次灾难。
2. Only then did we decide to answer violence with violence. (P34)
Only+状语+部分倒装句
Only in this way can we find the correct answer.お
即时强化练习：
翻译下列句子：
1) 只有当你遭遇过这样的事情后你才会相信。
2) 只有在这样的一个家庭你才有这样的好生活。
目标解读
1. Will you help others with their work if they ask you? (P33)
help sb with sth 帮助某人做某事
Would you please help me with my homework?
help的其它用法：
1）help sb. (to) do sth. 帮助某人做某事。
Can you help me to learn English?-
2）help oneself （ to sth ）自用（食物等）；随便拿
Help yourself to the fish. 请随便吃鱼。
3）help sb. into/ out of 搀扶某人进入 / 走出。
He helped the patient out of the hospital.
他搀扶病人走出了医院。
Can you help the patient into the hospital?
你能搀扶病人进医院吗？
4）help sb. out 帮助某人克服困难，渡过难关、解决问题、完成工作。 When I’m in trouble, he always helps me out with money.
每当我处境困难时，他总是用金钱帮助我渡过难关。
Please help me out with thi
篇9：高一新课标第三模块人教版教案(新课标版高一英语必修三教案教学设计)
1. Unit 1 Festivals around the world
2. Teaching aims of this unit
Talk about festivals and celebrations
Talk about the ways to express request and thanks
Learn to use Modal verbs
Write a similar story with a different ending
3. Sentence patterns:
Request:
Could/ Would you please…?
Could I have…?
Could we look at…?
I look forward to…
May I see…?
Thanks:
It’s very kind of you…
Thank you very much/ Thanks a lot.
I’d love to.
It was a pleasure…
Don’t mention it.
You are most welcome.
4. Modal verbs:
May might, can could will would shall should must can
The first period Speaking
1. Teaching aims:
Vocabulary: take place, lunar, festival, Army Day, Christmas, dress up
Phrases: Would you like … Could I have…?
Might I offer help…? May I see…?
You should try…Could we like at…?
Can you suggest…? We might take…
Teaching Procedures
Step I Leading in
T: Hello, everybody! Welcome back to school! Did you have a good time in your winter holidays?
Ss. Yes. Of course!
T: When did you feel most happy and excited?
Ss: At the Spring Festival.
T: Who can tell us why? Any volunteers?
S1: Because it is the most important festival in our country.
S2: Because I got a lot of lucky money from my parents.
S3: Because I needn’t study at festivals and there was a lot of delicious food to eat. How great.
S4: Because I met my cousins and friends who I hadn’t seen for a long time.
T. Very food! I am glad to hear that. Today we will talk about festivals, which are meant to celebrate important events. Please think about some other festivals. Can you name just a few?
Ss: New year, Yuan xiao festival…
:T: Quite right. That’s called the Lantern’s Festival. How about some other festivals?
Ss: The Army Day, International Labour’s Day, National Day, Tomb Sweeping Festival, Dragon Boat Festival, Mid-autumn Day…
T: You have done a good job, boys and girls! .
Step ⅡWarming –up
Festivals are meant to celebrate important events. Different countries have different festivals. Work in groups and lost five Chinese festivals that you know. Discuss when they take place, what they celebrate and one thing that people do at that time. The first one is given to you as an example.
Festivals Time of year/date What does it celebrate What do people do
Mid-Autumn Festival Autumn/Fall The beauty of the full moon, harvest, time with family and friends Give/Eat mooncakes and watch the full moon with family and friends
Step Ⅲ Pre- reading
Discuss in groups of four
1. What’s your favourite holiday of the year? Why?
2. What festivals or celebrations do you enjoy in your city or town? Do you like spending festivals with your family or with friends? What part of a festival do you like best---the music, the things to see, the visits or the food?
Step ⅣAssignment
1. Consolidation
2. Listening to the material again after class to be familiar with it.
3. Homework: Collect as much information about festivals as possible.
The second period Reading
Teaching Aims
1.Vocabulary: starve, starvation, plenty, satisfy ancestor lamps lead feast bone origin in memory of dress up trick poet arrival national gain independence gather agricultural European custom awards watermelon handsome rooster admire look forward to religious as though have fun with daily
2.To enable the students to know the earliest festivals with reasons for them and four
different kinds of festivals that occur in most parts of the world
3.To enable the students to master some English expressions and phrases about festivals.
4. Teach the basic reading skills: skimming and scanning.
5. Try to compare and make conclusion s of different festivals.
Step ⅠRevision
1. Greetings.
2. Review the new words of this part.
3. Check the students’ homework---festivals
Step ⅡReading
1.Scanning
T: Open your books and turn to page one. I’d like you to do the scanning. Read the text quickly and accurately to get the main idea and answer the 6 questions on Page3.
( Ask the student to look through the questions and then read the text silently.)
( Four minutes later, check the answers with the whole class. Show the suggested answers on the screen.)
2.Intensive reading
( Allow the students to read aloud and carefully this time to understand the main ideas of each paragraph and the important details)
T: Read the text loudly for a second time and them try to tell if these sentences are True or False.
1. The ancient people needn’t worry about their food. ( F )
2.Halloween used to be a festival intended to honor the dead. ( T )
3.Qu Yuan was a great poet who people honor a lot in China. ( T )
4.Mid-autumn Festival is held to celebrate the end ot autumn( F )
5.Easter celebrates the birth of Jesus. ( F )
3.Reading and discussion
T: Read the text a third time and then work impairs to do Exercise 2 on Page 3.
( Let the students have enough time to read the passage carefully and discuss the chart with their partners. Encourage them to expand their answers according to their own experiences.)
4.Explanation
(In this part try to help the students analyse the difficult, long and complex sentences and guess the meaning of the new words; ask them to deal with the language points in the context.)
T: Now I will discuss some important sentences and phrases in the passage.
a. Some festivals are held to honor the dead, or satisfy and please the ancestors, who could return either to help or to do harm.
b. In memory of
c. In India there is a national festival on October 2 to honor Mahatma Gandhi, the leader who helped gain India’s independence from Britain.
d. People are grateful because their food is gathered for the winter, and because a season of agricultural work is over.
e. The most energetic and important festivals are the ones that look forward to the end of winter and to the coming of spring.
f. The country is covered with cherry flowers so that it looks as though it might be covered with pink snow.
The suggested explanation:
a. An attributive clause.
The sentence means people hold some festivals either to show respect to the dead or to make their ancestors happy in case they might come back to do harm.
b. in memory of … serving to recall sb, to keep him fresh in people’ minds.
He wrote a poem in memory of his dearest wife, who died in an accident.
in honor of ( showing great respect or high public regard)
in hopes/the hope of (hoping)
in defence of (defending)
c. a noun phrase followed by an attributive clause as the appositive
d. two clauses for reason
e. energy→energetic adj. ( full of or done with energy)
look forward to ( to is a preposition here.)
devote to, be/get used to, get down to , stick to
e.g. I’m looking forward to hearing from you.
Step Ⅲ Listening
T: Now I will play the tape for you. You can just listen with your books closed or look at your books or read in a low voice together with the tape. It’s up to you. After listening, please write down three things that most festivals seem to have in common.( Comprehending Ex.3 on Page 3).
The third period Learning about language
Teaching aims:
1. Let the students know the usage of modal verbs.
2. Enable the students to recognize the words and expressions in the reading passage according to what mean the same as them.
Step Ⅰ Greeting and Revision
( Ask some students to retell the text we learned .)
StepⅡ. Practicing the useful words and expressions
T: As we know, there are two important kinds of verbs---transitive verbs and intransitive verbs. But many intransitive verbs have the structure “verb+preposition+objects ” Can you give me some examples?
Ss: Sure. Such as look at the picture, hear from my friends, listen to the radio and so on.
T: Ok. Now turn to page 4, Ex. 4. You are to make some sentences of your own, using the words given.
S1. I’m looking forward to hearing form my friend
S2: We are talking about verbs.
S3: Would you like to talk with me?
S4: Who can think of an effective solution to the problem?
S5: Please think about my proposal.
Step Ⅲ Useful Structures
T: Let’s come to the next part. This part is about modal verbs. You are to read the sentences in Ex. 1 and then to find out and write down different sentences with modal verbs form the reading passage and try to explain their meanings. If you have any difficulty in understanding them you can refer to Grammar in Pages 92---94
Step Ⅳ Summing up and home work
T: Boys and girls, today we have practiced useful words and phrases of this unit and the usage of modal verbs. I think it is not easy for you to master them, after class you should review them.
Homework
1. Practice of WBP42EX.1,2,3.
2. Please find out10 sentences with modal verbs, and try to get their meanings.
The fourth period Listening
Teaching aims:
1. Vocabulary: go with, the big bands, musicians, over and over again, for sale, get used to, the winners of this year’s awards for the best costumes
2. Enable the students to know how to get the key words to understand the conversation about the carnival parade, to talk about sth happened and express request and thanks.
Step Ⅰ Revision
After checking the WB Ex. 1,2,3 the teacher ask the students to give examples about modal verbs and try to explain them.
Step Ⅱ Warming up
T: By the way, what’s the topic of this unit?
Ss: Festivals around the world.
T: Would you like to know something more about festivals around the world?
Ss: Of course.
T: Now I will show you several pictures. What’s the festival called?
Ss: Carnival.
T: Yes. This class we will listen to a dialogue about carnivals. First look through the four questions in listening part to find out the listening points.
Step Ⅲ Listening
T: I will play the tape for you twice. Please listen carefully and pay much attention to the important points. For the first time you are to make notes beside the questions. For the second time, you should write down the answers and then check them with your partners.
( It’s important to encourage the students to adapt their present knowledge any
skill to a variety of situations wherever they can. Make sure to allow various
expressions of the answers. Do not demand the same words form all students.)
Step Ⅳ Speaking
This part is intended to give the students the opportunity to practice a telephone conversation using the functional items for requests and thanks. The polite form of English are important and should be practiced in a variety of situations.
Step Ⅴ Listening task
T: There are about 10 minutes left. Let’s come to listening task. Turn to page 43
and look at the pictures. They have something in common. Can you find it out?
Ss: They are all about festivals bout the dead.
T: That’s right. I will play the tape for you. For the first time you should try to
write down the name of the country where the festival are held. For the next two times you should do Ex2. You can make a brief note first and then complete the chart, according to which you can make a report.
The fifth period Extensive reading
Teaching aims:
1. Vocabulary: heart-broken, turn up, keep one’s word, hold one’s breath, drown one’s sadness in coffee, set off for, remind somebody of something,
2. Learn to compare the festivals in China and in western countries.
Step ⅠRevision
Check homework
Step ⅡReading (1)
T: As we know, there are all kinds of festivals around the world. We have talked about two Chinese festivals for the dead. Today we are going ti read a sad story, which is to introduce a cross cultural view of lovers’ festival-Qi Qiao and Valentine’s Day. Now please read it quickly and find out the sentence below are true or false.
The girl Li Fang loved and waited but she didn’t turn up. But he didn’t lose heart.(F….)
Because her most lovely daughter got married to a human secretly, the Goddess got very angry. .(…T.)
Zhinv was made to return to Heaven without her husband. They were allowed to meet once a year on the seventh day of the tenth lunar month, .(F….)
Hu Jin had been waiting for Li Fang for a long time with a gift for him. .(…T.)
T: I think you have got the general idea of the passage. Now please read the passage once more and answer the questions on Page 8.
Some language points:
1. turn up: appear
2.keep her word: keep her promise
3.hold his breath: wait without much hope
4.drown one’s sadness/sorrow in coffee: drink coffee in order to forget the sadness/ sorrow
5.remind sb of sth: make sb think of sth
Step Ⅲ Discussion and writing
T: That’s for the reading part of the passage. Please think about the ending of the story. Are you satisfied with the ending? Different people have different opinions to a matter. Now any one of you have an opportunity to make up an ending to the story. Please engage imaginatively in the story and use your own ideas. Try to use the vocabulary and structures you have learned of you like.
Step Ⅳ Reading(2)
T: Let’s come to another passage about carnival in Quebec. Please turn to Page 44, read it quickly and answer the questions in Page 45. Five minutes for you.
Added material:
Thanksgiving Day
Fourth Thursday in November is celebrated as ‘Thanksgiving Day’ People thank God for his blessings. People can ‘Thank’ friends, foes and anyone for the experiences, happiness and sunshine they bring into their lives. Pilgrims celebrated the first Thanksgiving Day in America during the second winter in the new world. The first winter had been bad as nearly half of the people had perished due to lack of food and bad weather. But the following year, with the help of Indians who showed them how to plant Indian corn, the pilgrims had successful harvest. Governor William Bradford decided that December 13, 1621 be set aside for feasting and prayer. The Indians were invited to share the festival. Since than, Thanksgiving Day is been celebrated in America. However, it was only in 1941, the Congress in a joint resolution named the fourth Sunday in November as the official Thanksgiving Day.
Dating back, it is known that the Council thought to appoint and set apart the 29th day of June, as a day of Solemn Thanksgiving and praise to God for his Goodness and Favour. The First Thanksgiving Proclamation was however on June 20, 1676. The governing council of Charlestown, Massachusetts, held a meeting to determine how best to express thanks for the good fortune that had seen their community securely established. By unanimous vote they instructed Edward Rawson, the clerk, to proclaim June 29 as a day of thanksgiving, It is also known that the Pilgrims set ground at Plymouth Rock on December 11, 1620. Their first winter was devastating. At the beginning of the following fall, they had lost 46 of the original 102 who sailed on the Mayflower. But the harvest of 1621 was a bountiful one. And the remaining colonists decided to celebrate with a feast -- including 91 Indians who had helped the Pilgrims survive their first year. It is believed that the Pilgrims would not have made it through the year without the help of the natives The feast was more of a traditional English harvest festival than a true “thanksgiving” observance. It lasted three days.
Thanksgiving, as we know it today, has come a long way from the Pilgrim's harvest festival in 1621. It is an event that seems, as each year goes by, to reinvent itself and to expand its meaning to larger vistas. Maybe this is the real significance of the occasion; for as we continue to change and grow as a people, there are an increasing number of things for which we can be thankful.
Halloween
The ancient Druids 督伊德教(古代高卢人与不列颠人的一种宗教)的教徒 who inhabited what we now call Great Britain placed great importance on the passing of one season to the next, holding “Fire Festivals” which were celebrated for three days (two days on either side of the day itself). One of these festivals was called Samhain (pronounced Sha-Von) and it took place on October 31 through to November 1. During this period, it was believed that the boundaries between our world and the world of the dead were weakened, allowing spirits of the recently dead to cross over and possess the living. In order to make themselves and their homes less inviting to these wayward spirits, the ancient Celts（凯尔特人）would douse （插入水中, 把弄熄, 弄湿）all their fires. There was also a secondary purpose to this, after extinguishing all their fires, they would re-light them from a common source, the Druidic fire that was kept burning at Usinach, in the Middle of Ireland.
Samhain was considered to be a gateway not only from the land of the dead to the land of the living, but also between Summer and Fall/Winter. For the Druids, this was the last gasp （喘息, 气喘）of summer (it was also the Celtic New Year), so therefore they made sure it went out with a bang before they had to button down （把...弄清楚）for the winter ahead.
They would dress up in bizarre costumes and parade through their villages causing destruction in order to scare off any recently departed souls who might be prowling （巡游）for bodies to inhabit, in addition to burning animals and other offerings to the Druidic deities（神, 神性）. It is also a popular belief that they would burn people who they believed to be possessed, but this has largely been debunked （揭穿, 拆穿假面具, 暴露）as myth.
This tradition was later brought to the North American continent by Irish immigrants who were escaping the Potato Famine in their homeland. In addition to the festival itself, the immigrants brought several customs with them, including one of the symbols most commonly associated with Halloween -- the Jack 'O Lantern.
According to Irish folklore, there once lived a man named Jack who was known for being a drunk and a prankster（顽皮的人, 爱开玩笑的人）. One night Jack tricked the devil into climbing a tree, and quickly carved an image of a cross on the trunk, trapping the devil. Jack then made him promise that, in exchange for letting him out of the tree, the Devil would never tempt him to sin again. He reluctantly agreed, but was able to exact his revenge upon Jack's death. Because of his mischievous ways in life, Jack was barred from entering heaven and because of his earlier trick, he was also barred from hell. So he was doomed to wander the earth until the end of time, with only a single ember（灰烬, 余烬） (carried in a hollowed out turnip.[植]芜箐, 芜箐甘蓝) to warm him and light his way. In Ireland, they originally also used turnips for their “Jack Lanterns”, but upon arriving in the new world, they discovered that pumpkins were abundant and easier to carve out.
Easter
On Good Friday, Jesus Christ was executed by crucifixion. His body was taken down from the cross, and buried in a cave. The tomb was guarded and an enormous stone was put over the entrance, so that no-one could steal the body. On the following Sunday, some women visited the grave and found that the stone had been moved, and that the tomb was empty. Jesus himself was seen that day, and for days afterwards by many people. His followers realised that God had raised Jesus from the dead.
Hot Cross Buns
Hot Cross buns are still made all over England around Easter time. At one time, buns with a cross on them were made all through Lent. They were banned by Oliver Cromwell and brought back again at the time of the Restoration. For a time they were only available on Good Friday but now they can be bought during the month leading up to Easter. Whole meal hot cross buns are becoming more popular each year.
The Easter Egg
As with the Easter Bunny and the holiday itself, the Easter Egg predates the Christian holiday of Easter. The exchange of eggs in the springtime is a custom that was centuries old when Easter was first celebrated by Christians.
From the earliest times, the egg was a symbol of rebirth in most cultures. Eggs were often wrapped in gold leaf or, if you were a peasant, colored brightly by boiling them with the leaves or petals of certain flowers.
Today, children hunt colored eggs and place them in Easter baskets along with the modern version of real Easter eggs -- those made of plastic or chocolate candy.
O-bon Festival
Bon Dance
During o-bon, bon odori (folk dances) are held all over Japan. The kind of dance varies from area to area. People wearing yukata (summer kimono) go to the neighborhood shrine, temple, or park and dance around a yagura (stage) set up there. Anyone can participate in the dance. Join the circle and imitate what others are doing. Awa odori of Tokushima and bon odori at Yasukuni Shrine, Tokyo are very famous.
Also, Toro Nagashi (floating paper lanterns) are held in some areas. On the evening of the 15th, people send off ancestor's spirits with a paper lantern, lit by a candle inside and floated down a river to the ocean. Fireworks displays (Hanabi-taikai) are often held during o-bon. It is a typical Japanese summer scene to see hanabi.
Since o-bon is an important family gathering time, many people return to their hometowns during o-bon. Most businesses are closed during this time. Although it is crowded everywhere, it is common for many people take trips during o-bon, too. The beginning and end of o-bon are marked with terrible traffic jams. Airports, train stations, and highways are jammed with travelers. I recommend you do not travel around o-bon!
Unit2 Healthy eating
Teaching Aims of this unit
1. Talk about healthy eating
2. Making suggestions or giving advice on diet
3. Distinguish the meanings of Modal verbs
4. Make a balanced menu
5. Vocabulary:
6. fiber,digestion,bean,slim,curiosity,lie,debt,glare,limit,benefit,item,protective get rid of, throw away, get away with, tell lies, earn one’s living in debt ,set out run one’s business ,carry on
7. Speaking: Practice talking about your ideas; practice giving suggestions and advice, practice
seeing the doctor.
8. The use o f ought to
The first period Warming up and reading
Step Ⅰ Warming up
Review the words of foods by showing their pictures. First, ask students to list the foods they like best. Then tick off 3 of them they eat most often. Second, show the three groups of foods and see which group their foods belong to. Third, ask the students to tell us in what ways their foods help them grow.
Step Ⅱ Pre-reading
Get the students to discuss the questions with their partners in this part. Then ask them to report their work. This part will help the students understand the text.
T: Please look at the slide show and discuss the questions with your partners. Then I’ll ask you to report your work. Are you clear?
Which food contains more… Examples of foods Answer
Sugar Chocolate or grapes
Cakes or bananas Chocolate
Cakes
Fat Cream or rice
Chocolate or chicken Cream
Chocolate
Fiber Peas or nuts
Pork or cabbage Nuts
Cabbage
protein Potato crisps or ham
Eggs or cream Ham
eggs
Step Ⅲ Reading
Get the students to comprehend the passage quickly and accurately and meanwhile help the students to form a good habit of reading. Give the students a couple o f minutes to look through the whole passage. Tell the students to read the text silently and then ask for the main idea of the text on the slide show with their partners. Encourage the students to express their ideas.
1. Fast reading
In this part ask the students to read the text quickly for the first time and find out the main idea of the text. Then ask them to read the text again carefully to obtain some details. Before reading show the tasks and let the students read the tasks first. This text will help them have a good understanding of the text.
a. The two restaurants supplied the healthy diet.
b. The reason why Yong Hui’s restaurant was so popular with customers.
c. Wang Pengwei found out why he had lost his customers and decided to win them back
2. Careful reading
T: Now it is time for us to read the text carefully and decide which sentences are true. Then correct the false ones. First read the sentences.
a. Usually Wang Pengwei’s restaurant was full of people. (T )
b. Yong Hui served a balanced diet. ( F)
c. Yong Hui could make people thin in two weeks by giving them a good diet. (F)
d. Wang Pengwei’s customers often became fat after eating in his reataurant. (T)
e. Yong Hui’s menu gives them energy foods. (F )
f. Wang Pengwei’s menu gives tem foods containing fiber. (F )
g. Wang Pengwei admired Yong Hui’s restaurant when he saw the menu. (F )
h. Wang Pengwei decided to copy Yong Hui’s menu. (F )
Step Ⅳ Comprehending
By now, the students have had a further understanding of the text. Let the students read the text again and find out the differences between the two restaurant.
T: Now please read the text again and fill in the chart together with your partner.
disadvantages advantages
Wang Pengwei’s restaurant Not giving enough foods containing fiber Provide plenty of energy foods
Yong Hui’s restaurant Not giving enough energy foods Providing plenty of fiber foods
T: Until now we have known what’s wrong with both restaurant. What does it matter if you only eat at one of the restaurant?
S1:…
S2:…
S3:…
T: You all have a point here. But what will they do? We will see it next period. Facing the serious competiton Wang wasn’t lost in sadness and he didn’t quarrel with his competitor either. He went to the library to learn more about healthy eating and made his menu better than Yong Hui’s menu. Do you think we should follow his example?
Ss: Yes.
T: Now let’s deal with some language points. Turn to page 10, let’s look at the sentences:
a. Wang Pengwei sat in his empty restaurant feeling very frustrated.
This sentence means that the second action “ feeling very frustrated” happened together with the main action “sat”. Pay attention to the form (v-ing) of the second action.
b. Nothing could have been better.
This sentence tells us that everything has worked out the way you would like. It’s a sentence that we can use in any situation.
c. He couldn’t have Yong Hui getting away with telling people lies!
This sentence means that he will punish Yong Hui for her telling lies.
Step Ⅴ Homework
1. Try to retell the text.
2. Prepare for the language learning and do Using words and Expressions on WB (Page 49-50)
The second period Language study
Step ⅠRevision
1. Check the students’ homework.
2. Ask some of the students to retell the text.
Step Ⅱ Word study
This part is a consolidation of the words in the text. Ask the students to do the exercise individually.
T: Now please open your books and turn to page 11. Fill in the chart using the correct forms of the words which have the same root. Next activity is to match the definitions with the words we have learnt form the text. I necessary, you can discuss with your partners.
…
Step Ⅲ Grammar
The students will learn the usage of modal verbs. First try to make the students clear the functions of modal verbs, with the help of the practice 1on page 12. Then give them some examples.
T: Please pick out all the sentences containing modal verbs in the text.
a. By lunchtime they would have all be sold---It indicates possibility.
b. His restaurant ought to be full of people.---It indicates possibility.
c. What could have happened?--- It indicates possibility.
d. Nothing could have been better.--- It indicates possibility.
e. Something terrible must have happened if Maochang was not coming to eat with him as he always did.---It indicates guessing.
f. He could not believe his eyes. ---It indicates intension.
g. He wonder if he should go to the library to find out ---It indicates duty.
h. He wouldn’t have Yong Hui getting away with telling people lies!---It indicates intension.
…
Step Ⅳ Homework
1. Review the rules of word formation and the meanings of modal verbs.
2. Prepare the Using Structure on page 50 by making a dialogue in pairs.
The third period Listening
Step Ⅰ Revision
1. Check the using structure on page 50.
2. Ask the students to make a short dialogue in pairs.
Step Ⅱ Listening( using language)
The students will hear what Wang Pengwei did after leaving Yong
Hui’s restaurant. Ask the students to finish the chart and answer the questions.
T: OK. We have studied the text and know neither of the restaurant supplied a balanced diet. Let’s listen to the tape and see how the story went on. Go through the text quickly on page 14.
( Play the tape. Students write down the answers and check the answers with their partners.)
T: Now listen to it again and try to make sure your answers are right.
Energy-giving Body-building Protective
Rice Meat Fruit
Noodles Fish vegetables
Nuts Tofu
butter
Step Ⅲ Listening (WB P48)
The students will heat a conversation between Hong Mei and the doctor. They are asked to do exercise according to the tape.
T: Doctor know that there are illnesses you may get if you do not eat properly. In the following part, we are going to listen to a dialogue. Hong Mei is going to see the doctor. Let’s see how the doctor gives her some advice. Listen carefully and do the exercises.
Red foods: stop (Only a little) Orange foods: be careful( some every day) Green foods: go( more every day)
Butter, cream, nuts, cakes, foods fried in fat Bread, noodles, rice, neat, cheese, egg, tofu All vegetables( potato, cabbage, carrots..)
Step Ⅳ Homework
1. Pre-view the reading(2) and reading task on Page 52. See how the story ended.
2. Find some information about healthy eating on the Internet.
The fourth period Extensive reading
Step ⅠRevision
1. Check the homework
2. Share the information the students have got form the Internet.
Step Ⅱ Pre-reading
Ask the students to read some proverbs and translate them into Chinese.
T: Today we are going to see the end of the story. First, please look at the blackboard and try to translate the proverbs into Chinese.
a. You are what you eat.
b. An apple a day keeps the doctor away.
c. First wealth is health.
The students discuss with their partners.
a. 人如其食.
b. 一天一个苹果,医生不来找我.
c. 健康是人生的第一财富.
Step Ⅲ Reading
The purpose of this reading is to complete the story of Wang Pengwei and Yong Hui and show the students that it is never too late to change bad eating habits and begin afresh. After the fast reading, let the students do the exercises on page 15. Then let them match the words with their definitions.
T: Eating healthily means that no food in itself is good or bad. Eating properly depends on eating the right variety of foods in the right amount. Let’s read the passage quickly and say what they did with their menu.
Ask the students to report their work.
What did they do? Result
Combine their menu and provide a balanced one
1. raw vegetables with hamburgers
2. the boiled potatoes, not fried
3. fresh fruit with ice cream 1. cut down the fat
2. increase the fibre
3. a big success
Then find the words from the text to match the definitions.
Definitions words
Stare angrily or fiercely Glare
Take a long deep breath Sigh
Keep alive in a certain style Earn one’s living
Advantage or profit Benefit
Join or mix together to form a whole Combine
Owe a lot of money In debt
Step Ⅳ Homework
1. Collect eating attitudes from the Internet
2. Practice presenting reasons to support your ideas.
The fifth period Speaking
Step ⅠRevision
Check the students’homework.
Step Ⅱ Warming up
T: Work in pairs to act out the dialogue on page 13. One plays as the role of Jane and the other plays the role of Susan. You are shopping in a supermarket.
First let the students make a good preparation themselves. Then ask several pairs to act out the dialogue before the class. In this part the, try to make the class get active.
Step Ⅲ Talking
If young people are too thin or too fat, it shows that they are not eating a balanced diet. So this exercise is to encourage the students to discuss how their diets may affect their quality of life.
( Divide the class into two groups: team A and team B.)
T: Now team A will take the role o f the patient who is worried about being too fat and has gone to the doctor for advice. Team B will take the role of the doctor and advise the patient how to change his or her diet. Here are some useful expressions. Imagine what you will say to the doctor or patient. Discuss with your group members.
Doctor Patient
What’s the matter? What should I do ?
How long have you been like this? What seem to be the trouble?
I think you ought to.. Do you think you could give me some advice?
Perhaps you should…
I suppose you had better…
Step Ⅳ Speaking task
This is the opportunity for the students to discuss their reaction to the information they have received. It allows students to have their own point of view and to practice explaining why they think as they do.
T: In the reading task we have read two speakers’arguments. Now it is your turn to discuss what you have heard at the meeting in groups of four. Two of ou argue for and two against building the restaurant. The following is useful to you. Please look at the table.
I don’t agree That’s a good idea.
I’m afraid not Certainly/ Sure.
Of course not. All right.
I don’t think so. No problem.
Yes, I think so.
Step Ⅴ Homework
1. Review the sentence structures, new words and expressions.
2. Imagine the old local restaurant has gone. What do you think should be built there. Present the advantages of your idea.
The sixth period Writing and re-viewing
Step ⅠRevision
Check the homework and take a dictation.
Step Ⅱ Writing
This is an opportunity for students to practice their persuasive writing skills and try to encourage others to support their point of view. The idea of a new library is chosen because it would be very useful in a town.
T: You know, we have mad ea decision that we won’t build a Mcdonal’s. But what do you think should be built on the land? Can you write an article to support your idea? Give you 20 minutes and finish your articles. Pay attention to the orders.
1. Describe the new design
2. Draw a plan
3. explain the advantages of your ideas
Unit Three The Million Pound Bank-Note
Teaching aims:
1. Talk about short stories and dramas.
2. Learn how to act out a play
3. Learn how to request and order food
4. Learn noun clauses as the object and predicative
The first period Intensive reading
Step I.Warming up
1.Mark Twain is probably one of the few American writers with whom students are already familiar. This exercise makes the teacher find out how much the students know about this writer and decide how much they need to know about the author before they read the play.
T: Do you know something about the American writer Mark Twain?
Ss: A little.
T: Today we will learn something about this great writer in the American history. Now please read “About Mark Twain” on page 23 so that you can know more about him.
3. Students read the passage about Mark Twain and answer the questions given in the form on page 23.
a. What’s the real name of Mark Twain?
b. When was he born and when did he die?
c. Do you know all the places where he lived?
d. Can you name three of his famous stories?
T: As we know, Mark Twain is known as a humorist during his life. And this is reflected in THE MILLION POUND BANK-NOTE. So, today we will learn some parts of this famous play.
Step ⅡPre-reading
Get the students to discuss the question with their partners and then ask them to report their work. Encourage to express their opinions freely.
T: If a rich person gives you a large amount of money to use as you like, for example, one million pound, what will you do? Why?
( Students have a discussion on this question. Whatever choice students make here, they should be ready to offer their classmates a good reason for it.)
…
T: I think all of you have a good idea. Do you want to know what happened to Henry Adams in THE MILLION POUND BANK-NOTE written by Mark Twain? Have you ever read the story? So this class we will learn the story together.
Step Ⅲ While reading
1. Scanning
Get the students to comprehend the whole scene quickly and accurately and meanwhile help them form a good habit of reading. Give the students some time to read through the scenes and then answer some questions
a. How did Henry Adams come to England?
b. Where did Henry work before? How much did he have?
c. What did the two gentlemen give Henry?
d. When can Henry open the letter.
2. After the students discuss the questions and then check the answers with the whole class.
T: Listen to the tape and try to find out the characteristics of the whole passage.
Ss: This is part of a play. So, the narration is written in the present tense.
T: OK. All of you have done a good job. Next, let’s read the scene again and do some exercises.
Step Ⅳ Post-reading
Do comprehending exercises and explain :
a. a large amount of: a large quantity of; a great deal of
e.g. They bought a large amount of furniture before they moved their new house.
b. make a bet: make an arrangement to risk money, etc. on an event of which the result is doubtful.
e.g. We made a bet on the result of the match.
c. permit sb to do something: allow somebody to do something
e.g. My mother doesn’t permit me to ride in the street after it rained.
d. by accident: as a result of chance
e.g. I only found it by accident.
e. stare at: look at somebody or something with the eyes wide open in a fixed gaze( in astonishment, wonder, fear, etc)
f. to be honest: to tell you the truth; to be frank
e.g. To be honest, I don’t think we have a chance of winning.
Step Ⅴ Homework
1. Review the key sentences in this part
2. Preview the words in the second period.
3. Act out the play in groups
The second period: Acting
Step I Acting
T: Are you ready to act out the play now< class?
Ss: Yes.
T: Good. Let’s welcome the first group and the second group please get prepared.
…
T: Class, we should pay attention to some examples of Mark Twain’s humor in this scene, which will help us better understand the play and act it out more appropriately. Do you agree with me?
Ss: Yes, of course.
Step II Homework
Review what we learned in this unit
The Third period Watching the movie The Million Pound Banknote
Unit 4 Astronomy: the science of stars
Teaching aims:
1. Talk about the science of stars
2. Practise giving instructions
4. Learn to use noun clauses as the subject
5. Learn to write an essay to show your problems and the way to overcome them.
6. Vocabulary: astronomy, atmosphere, violent, explode, surface, disappointed, gradually, cheer, mass, harmful, presence, in time, prevent …from… depend on, now that, get the hang of, break out
The first period Intensive reading
Step Ⅰ Presentation
T: Hello, everyone! Today we will come to Unit 4, Astronomy. Before that I have a question: where do we come from? Or we can say: Who are our ancestors?
S1: Monkeys!
S2: Beijing Ren who lived many years ago.
S3: dinosaurs
…
T: Very good! Do you know what it was like before life appeared on earth?
S4: Full of water…
Bs: I don’t know.
T: Do you want to get more information?
Ss: Yes, we do.
T: Today we will learn something about how life began on earth. Turn to page 25. Let’s come to Warming up first.
Step Ⅱ Warming up
5. Read the three questions, while the students listen and follow.
6. Give the students several minutes to discuss the questions.
7. Collect answers from the class.
8. Check answers while discussing.
Step Ⅲ Pre-reading
Get the students to discuss the questions on page 25 with their partners. Then ask the students to tell their stories. Encourage them to tell different stories, If they don’t know any, tell them some.
T: Now discuss these questions with your partners. Then I will ask some of you to tell us your stories. Are you clear?
Ss: Yes.
a. Do you know each religion or culture has its own ideas about the beginning of the universe? Give an example if you know.
b. Do you know what a scientific idea is?
Read some stories to the students.
Pangu separates the sky from the earth;
The Biblical Account;
India;
Japan;
Europe;
…
Step Ⅳ Reading
1. Scanning
Get the students to read the passage quickly and accurately and meanwhile help the students to form a good habit of reading. Give the students a couple of minutes to look throuth the whole passage. Tell them to read silently and then ask some detailed questions about the text. Encourage them to express their ideas.
T: We are going to learn a passage about how life began on the earth. Now read the text quickly and then answer my questions.
a. What was there on the earth before life began?
b. Why do scientist think there has never been life on the moon?
c. Why do animals first appear in the sea?
d. Why do green plants help life to develop?
e. Why were mammals different from other animals?
Discuss the answers with the whole class.
2. Skimming
In this part, students will read the text again and finish part 1,2,3
T: Now skim the passage fast to finish part1,2,3,4 Then we will check the answers together.
Key to part 1: DBIGEHACFJ
Discuss the rest with the students.
Step Ⅴ Listening
Listen to the tape for the students to follow and have further understanding of the passage.
T: Read after the tape, then answer me some questions with your book closed.
a. How did water come into being on the earth?
b. Why is water important on earth?
Step Ⅵ Language points
T: Turn to page 25. Let’s look at the sentences:
a. It exploded loudly with fire and rock, which were in time to produce the water vapour.
Which leads non-restrictive attributive clause.
in time: sooner or later; eventually
I will see him in time.
In time ( for sth/to do sth): not late
She will be back in time to prepare dinner.
In/out of time: in/not in the correct time
The audience clapped in time to the music.
b. Nobody knew that it was going to be different from other planets going around the sun.
Be different from: not like someone or something else in one or more ways
City life is quite different from country life.
c. Whether life will continue on the earth for millions of years to come will depend on whether this problem can be solved.
To come: serves as attributive
She is the last person to do such a thing.
Depend on: something might only happen or be true if the circumstances are right for it
Our success depends on whether everyone works hard or not.
d. Walking does need a bit of practice now that gravity has changed.
Now that: because of the fact that
Now that I am free, I can enjoy music for a while.
Now that you have grown up, you can decide it by yourself.
Step Ⅶ Homework
1. Retell the passage
2. Remember important language points
The second period Language study
Step Ⅰ Revision
1. Check retelling of the passage
2. Translate the following sentences.
a. 你迟早会成功的.
b. 我的车与你的不一样.
c. 站在门旁边的那个人是谁?
d. 他总是第一个来,最后一个走.
e. 既然你已经长大了,你自己决定吧.
Suggested answers:
a. You will succeed in time.
b. My car is different from yours.
c. Who is the person standing by the door?
d. He is always the first to come and the last to go.
e. Now that you have grown up you can decide it yourself.
Step Ⅱ Word study
This part is a consolidation of the words learnt in this unit. Ask the students to do the exercises individually.
a. Page 27. First let students finish part 1,2
b. Check the answers with the whole class.
c. Give students 3minutes to finish part 3.
d. Let the students read part 4 for a while and finish it.
e. Turn to page 63. First let the students finish 1and 2 and check the answers.
Step Ⅲ Preparation
Show some sentences on the blackboard.
a. A tree has fallen across the road.
b. You are a student.
c. To find your way can be a problem.
d. Smoking is bad for you.
e. “How do you do?” is a greeting.
f. What she said is not yet known.
g. That we shall be late is certain.
h. It’s certain that we shall be late .
T: What part does the underlined part serve as in each sentence? Or find its subject in each sentence.
Step Ⅳ Grammar
1. Give the students some time to find the sentences in the passage. The collect answers from the class.
2. Show typical examples of how to make a subject clause. Guide the Ss to find out what changes we have to make when we make a sentence or combine two sentences using subject clause. Teacher shows the example and Ss write down the sentences.
3. Turn to page 64. Read the following passage quickly and finish the eight sentences.
4. Have a discussion in pairs. The topic is My dream. One talks about the problems in his study or life, another gives some advice. Remind the students to use the following structures
a. My problem is…
b. My trouble is…
c. The question is…
d. My advice is…
e. What I think about it is…
f. The fact is…
g. My suggestion is…
Step ⅤHomework
1. Finish part 3(P23)
2. Finish part 3(P64)
Added material:
什么是黑洞？
就是在宇宙中有那么一些点，这些点的体积趋向于零而密度变得无穷大，由于具有强大的吸引力，物体只要进入离这个点一定距离的范围内，就会被这个强大的引力吸收掉，连光线也不例外。因此任何进入这个范围的物体都无法再逃出来，就是说，没有任何信号能够从这个范围内传出，因此这个范围的界限被称作视界，里面的情形人类无法看到。所以科学家给它起了个名字叫黑洞，英文就是black hole。 一颗燃烧尽了的恒星由于自身的重力而不断坍缩，最后就会形成黑洞。
历时30年霍金改观点 称黑洞能“吸”能“吐”
从事宇宙黑洞研究近三十年的世界天体物理学泰斗斯蒂芬霍金在前不久承认“黑洞悖论”有误之后，21号，他在爱尔兰都柏林举行的一个学术研讨会上终于就自己的新发现向外界进行了详细阐述。
黑洞是宇宙中引力极强的区域。19世纪70年代，霍金首次提出黑洞能够辐射能量的理论，但是在引入这一理论的同时，霍金也制造了物理学上的一个巨大难题，因为他认为
黑洞辐射不包含以前吸入物质的相关信息，而且随着黑洞的消失，曾经存在的黑洞的相关信息也会消失于无形。这与量子力学中认为物质信息不会完全消失的理论相矛盾。对此，过去近30年来，霍金的解释是：黑洞中的量子运动是一种特殊情况，这种说法受到了许多科学家的质疑。
如今，霍金终于改变了观点，在当天召开的学术研讨会上，霍金说，根据他的最新发现，黑洞并非只是吞噬物质。除了会在星系形成的过程中扮演重要角色外，在经过一段相当漫长的时间后，黑洞也会把一些曾被它吸入的物质信息向外界释放出来。
霍金的最新阐述被不少人称为黑洞理论的一个重要逆转。美国加州理工学院的理论物理学家约翰普雷斯基就是其中之一。20多年前，霍金提出黑洞辐射理论时，普雷斯基就一直坚持物质信息不会完全消失，当时两人还因此打赌。所以，在当天结束演讲后，霍金将一本百科全书赠予普雷斯基，作为打赌输了的代价，而普雷斯基则获得了全场的热烈掌声。
Black holes
(1) What is a black hole? Well, it's difficult to answer this question, since the terms we would normally use to describe a scientific phenomenon are inadequate here. Astronomers and scientists think that a black hole is a region of space (not a thing ) into which matter has fallen and from which nothing can escape---- not even light. So we can't see a black hole. A black hole experts a strong gravitational pull and yet it has no matter. It is only space ---- or so we think . how can this happen?
(2) The theory is that some stars explode when their density increases to a particular point; they collapse and sometimes a supernova occurs. Form earth , a supernova looks like a very bright light in the sky which shines even in the daytime. Supernovae were reported by astronomers in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. Some people think that the Star of Bethlehem could have been a supernova. The collapse of a star may produce a White Dwarf or a neutron star--- a star , whose matter is so dense that it continually shrinks by the force of its own gravity. But if the star is very large (much bigger than our sun) this process of shrinking may be so intense that a black hole results. Imagine the earth reduced to the size of a marble, but still having the same mass and a stronger gravitational pull, and you have some idea of the force of a black hole. Any matter near the black hole is sucked in. It is impossible to say what happens inside a black hole. Scientists have called the boundary area around the hole the “ event horizon.” We know nothing about events which happen once objects pass this boundary. But in theory, matter must behave very differently inside the hole.
(3) For example , if a man fell into a black hole, he would think that he reached the center of it very quickly. However an observer at the event horizon would think that the man never reached the center at all. Our space and time laws don't seem to apply to objects in the area of a black hole. Einstein's relativity theory is the only one which can explain such phenomena , so that there is no “ absolute” time and space depend on the position of the observer. They are relative. We do not yet fully understand the implications of the relativity theory; but it is interesting that Einstein's theory provided a basis for the idea of black holes before astronomers started to find some evidence for their existence. It is only recently that astronomers have begun specific research into black holes. In August 1977, a satellite was launched to gather data about the 10 million black holes which are thought t be in the Milky way. And astronomers are planning a new observatory to study the individual exploding stars believed to be black holes.
(4) The most convincing evidence of black holes comes from research into binary star systems. Binary stars, as their name suggests ,are twin stars whose position in space affects each other. In some binary systems, astronomers have shown that there is an invisible companion star, a “partner” to the one which we can see in the sky. Matter from the one we can see is being pulled towards the companion star. Could this invisible star, which exerts such a great force , be a black hole? Astronomers have evidence of a few other stars too, which might have black holes as companions.
(5) The story of black holes is just beginning . Speculations about them are endless. There might be a massive black hole at the center on our galaxy swallowing up stars at a very rapid rate. Mankind may one day meet this fate. On the other hand, scientists have suggested that very advanced technology could one day make use of the energy of black holes for mankind. These speculations sound like science fiction. But the theory of black holes in space is accepted by many serious scientists and astronomers .they show us a world which operates in a totally different way from our own and they question our most basic experience of space and time.
Read the passage carefully and choose the best answer for the following questions
1) Black holes are related to ____
A. geography B. astronomy C. physics D. economic
2) A black hole is ____
A. a dark star B. a large heavenly body
C. a region of space D. a great mass of matter
3) what causes some stars to explode, theoretically speaking ?
A. their density B. their gravity. C. their movement D. their light
4) Scientists call the area around the black hole ____.
A. a White Dwarf B. a supernova
C. the event horizon D. the star of Bethlehem
5) according to Einstein's relativity theory, there is no “absolute ” time and space. Is it true or false?
A. true B. false
6) which of the following statements is not true? The story of black holes in space____
A. is accepted by many serious scientists and astronomers
B. has to some extent been proved by research into binary star system
C. is questioning our basic idea of space and time
D. Sounds like science fiction
7) according to the passage , our earth may be swallowing by the black hole one day, is it true or false ?
A. true B. false
8) according to the passage , the human being one day may make use of the energy of black hole by advanced technology. Is it true or false?
A. true B. false
Unit 5 Canada---The true north
Teaching aims:
1. Talk about the basic information about Canada.
2. Learn how to read a traveling report and use maps.
3. Learn to express locations and directions.
4. Master the noun clauses--- appositive clause
5. Vocabulary: minister, continent, surround, dawn, booth, slightly, settle down, have a gift for, figure out, as far as, all the way, rather than
The first period
Step Ⅰ Revision
1. Check the students’ homework
2. Check the assignment.
Step ⅡLead-in and warming up
Show the students the maple flag and ask them some questions.
T: Do you know which country uses this national flag?
Ss: Canada.
T: What continent is Canada in?
Ss: In North America.
T: How large is it?
Ss: It is the second largest country in the world.
T: Yes. It occupies an area of 9,984,670 square kilometers. It is a bit bigger than China. Which country is its neighbor?
Ss: The United States.
(Show a map of Canada to the students)
T. Right. The United States is . Canada is a beautiful country. First let’s have a quiz and see how much do you know about Canada.
( Give the Ss one minute to finish the quiz.)
T: OK. Time is up. Let’s check the answers.
1.C 2.D 3.A 4.B 5.A
Step Ⅲ Pre-reading
T: Now I want to ask you a question: Do you like travelling?
Ss: Yes.
T: I know most of you do. So have you ever been abroad?
Ss: Yes/No.
T: What’s the longest trip you have ever taken?
…
T: Very good. If we want to make our motherland more beautiful and more developed, we should know more about other countries. Here are two questions, you may ask your partner for answers and give your answers to him/her.
a. If you take a trip to Canada, what do you expect to see?
b. What three words would you use to describe Canada?
(Ask some pairs to tell their ideas to their classmates.)
Step Ⅳ Fast reading
Get the students to read the passage quickly and accurately and meanwhile help the students to form a good habit of reading.
T: Do you feel puzzled when you read the title? What is the true north? Now read the passage and get the general idea of the passage. Underline the main places mentioned in the text.
Give the Ss 5 minutes for reading.
a. What the passage is mainly about?
b. What are the main places mentioned in the text?
c. Draw the traveling route of the two girls on the map.
T: Do you have any difficulty in reading? Now let’s discuss some difficult points together.
Step Ⅴ Homework
1. Remember the underlined sentence.
2. Write a short passage to report what Li Daiyu and Liu Qian saw in Canada.
The second period
Step ⅠRevision
1. Have a dictation.
2. Ask two students to write on the blackboard.
3. Ask one student to make a short report.
Step Ⅱ Lead-in
T: Li Daiyu and Liu Qian were on the train yesterday. The train rushed across the top of the Lake Superior. Which is the next city it runs towards?
Ss: Toronto.
T: Toronto is an important city. It is the finance center of Canada. It has rich popular arts and culture. How much do you know about Toronto?
Ss: There are Chinatowns where you can buy Chinese medicine.
T: Quite right. Do you want to know more about Toronto?
Ss: Yes.
Step Ⅲ Reading
T: Read the passage on 38. In this passage, you can learn a lot about Toronto, and Montreal, which is Canada’s second largest city. I will give you four minutes to read the passage, then answer the questions on 37-38.
Four minutes later, check the answers with the class.
Step Ⅳ Intensive reading(reading task)
T: Read the passage and fill in the chart using the information of the text.
Points in the passage What Beth thought Information in passage
The temperature
How to travel
Holidays
How people live
What the Inuit do
Daylight hours
T: You can have a discussion with your partner.
Step Ⅴ Discussion
T: We have known a lot about Canada. Now let’s compare China with Canada.
Same as China Different from China
Large land Six time area
Weather is different from area to area, long and hard winter No places as hot as south china
Different people speak different languages Canada has two official languages, smaller population
Many rivers and lakes World famous rivers and lakes
Much coal, oil gas and other natural resources Much fresh water, a lot of forest
Step Ⅵ Homework
2. Read the two passages again and find the main characters of Toronto, Montreal and Iqaluit.
3. Read fun reading by yourself.
篇10：高一必修4Unit1教案包(新课标版高一英语必修四教案教学设计)
Warming up
Teaching aims:
To introduce six great women and their achievements.
Teaching key points and difficult points:
To explain some words: Quaker, China Welfare Institute, campaign, etc.
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Lead-in
1. Do you know any great people or important people? (Show some pictures to Ss)
2. What qualities make a great person?
(clever, brave, determined, confident, hard-working, unselfish, kind, active, generous…)
Step 2 Warming up
1. Pictures and Questions (Page 1)
Ask Ss read the introduction of six women and answer the following questions:
Elizabeth Fry: What did she do to help the prisoners?
Soong Qingling: Who is she? What’s her great achievement?
Jane Goodall: What’s her achievement in the study of Chimps?
Jody Williams: What did she get in ?
Joan of Arc: Do you know the name of the girl in ancient China whose experience was similar to her?
Lin Qiaozhi: What’s her major?
Step 3 Talking
1. Which of these women do you think is a great woman?
2. To be a great woman, what qualities do you think should she have? Look at the list of qualities that were discussed when we examined a great man. Are there any other qualities that you would like to add?
(intelligent, determined, generous, kind, modest, unselfish, hard-working, brave, confident,
considerate, thoughtful, energetic, imaginative, honest, decisive, sensible…)
Step 4 Discussion
1. Do you know a woman who really inspires (encourages) you? Describe her and explain why.
Tips: What does she look like? Why did she choose to …?
What do you think about..? What are her reputations?
Why do you admire her? What are her contributions?
How would you describe her?
2. Is it harder for women to become famous or get jobs in high positions? Why?
Step5 Language points
1. achieve vt./vi.
1) to get sth. done by working hard / as the result of an action or effort 完成；实现
The reason I achieve good results is because I work hard-and so could you.
我取得好成绩的原因是因为我学习努力。你也能够做到。
2) vi. succeed 成功；达到
He achieved because he was a hard worker. 他成功是因为他工作努力。
△achievement n.
As we climbed the final few metres, we felt a sense of achievement.
当我们爬完最后几米时，我们感到一种成功感。
2. condition n. [C/U] 条件；状况
The astronauts soon got used to the condition of weightlessness.
宇航员们很快就适应了失重的状态。
My computer’s a few years old, but it’s in really good condition.
我的电脑用了好几年了，但是性能还是很好。
3.concern onself with sb./sth. 关心某人/某事；为…担忧/烦恼
A teacher should love his students, and concern himself with their needs and desires.
老师应该爱护学生，关心他们的需求。
4. connection n.联系
connection between A and B A与B 的联系
Is there a connection between smoking and lung cancer? 吸烟和肺癌有联系吗?
connection with / to sth. 与…有联系
His failure has no connection with the quality of his work.他的失败与他的工作性质没有联系。
5. drive… out (of) : to force someone or something to leave 把…赶出去
The Chinese fought hard for 8 years and drove the Japanese aggressors out of China.
中国人民抗战八年,把日本侵略者赶出中国。
6. campaign n.战役；（政治或商业性）活动；运动
The plan of campaign had been made long before the war broke out.
作战计划早在战争爆发前就制定好了。
Bush’s campaign succeeded and he won the election again.布什竞选成功，再次当选总统。
Europe has started a campaign to stop people smoking.欧洲发起了一场戒烟运动。
△war, campaign, battle, fight/fighting 都与战争有关，但其规模排序为：
war >campaign >battle >fight/fighting
Gulf War 海湾战争 Huaihai Campaign 淮海战役
Pingxingguan Battle平型关大战 Battle of Waterloo 滑铁卢战役
△campaign, movement, activity 都与“活动”有关。campaign指为了达到某一目的而采取的一项或一系列积极有力的措施。如：an election campaign 竞选活动。
movement指社会或政治运动，如：the movement for national liberation 民族解放运动。 还指移动、动作、姿势等。
activity多指消遣活动或教育活动，如：
Too many out-of-class activities take up too much of our precious time for study.
7. devote vt. to use all or most of your time, effort, etc. 献身；致力于；专心于
devoted adj. [to] loyal; caring a great deal; fond of 忠诚的；挚爱的
△devote sth. to sth. / doing sth. 献身于/致力于/专心于（做）某事
devote oneself to sth./ doing sth.
be devoted to sth. / doing sth.
△be devoted to sb. 对某人忠诚/喜爱某人
Soong Chingling devoted all her life to the Chinese revolution and construction.
宋庆龄一生致力于中国的革命和建设事业。
a devoted wife / friend / father 忠诚的妻子/忠实的朋友/关怀备至的父亲
Step 6 Assignments
1. Revise the new words.
2. Discuss the two questions in “Pre-reading”.
3. Preview “Reading”.
Unit 1 Women of achievement
The First Period Reading
Teaching goals 教学目标
1． Target language 目标语言
a. 重点词汇
achieve, achievement, condition, welfare, institute, connection, campaign, organization, specialist, behave, behavior, worthwhile, nest, observe, observation, respect, argue, entertainment, inspire, support, devote ... to
b. 重点句子
Watching a family of chimps wake up is our first activity of the day. P2
Everybody sits and waits while the animals in the group begin to wake up and move. P2
But the evening makes it all worthwhile. P2
... we see them go to sleep together in their nest for the night. P2
Only after her mother came to help her for the first few months was she allowed to begin her project. P2
For forty years Jane Goodall has been helping the rest of the world understand and respect the life of these animals. P2
2． Ability goals 能力目标
a. Learn Warming Up, and know how to tell the great women and the famous women.
b. Learn the way to describe a person from what the person did, what she/he looks like and so on.
3． Learning ability goals 学能目标
Teach Ss how to describe a person.
Teaching important points 教学重点
a. By reading A protector of African wildlife, students can learn from Jane Goodall in at least two aspects: one is what is the humane way to study animals; the other is that it was her great personality - universal love and mercy（博爱与慈悲 ）that made her successful. If everyone had such kind of heart, they would give everything benefit for all living things. Then our world will be full of love and peace, without any war and starvation.
b. Ask students to answer these questions:
1) What made her a great success?
2) What should we learn from Jane Goodall?
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
Let everyone believe that all of us can become Jane Goodall.
Teaching methods 教学方法
Inspiration, Questioning and Discussion.
Teaching aids 教具准备
A computer, a projector and a recorder.
Teaching procedures & ways 教学过程与方式
StepⅠLead-in
T: Good morning, everyone! Haven’t seen you for a long time. Did you have a good time in your holidays? What did you do during the holidays?
S1: Yes, I had a good time. You know I enjoy movies, sports and other types of entertainment. I saw several favorite films and every afternoon, I would play basketball with my friends.
S2: I would die of boredom. I didn’t know what to do but read. I didn’t know how to relax myself. I just hoped that the new term began. The sooner, the better.
T: That sounds interesting. In fact, boredom is a kind of feeling. There is a good way to be away from it. Believe it or not, that is to help others, no matter who they are, human being or animals. Have a try, Ok? Today we’ll learn Unit 1. It introduces several women to us and tells us how they live and work. Now let’s turn to Page 1. Look at these pictures and the brief introductions, then work in pairs to discuss which of these women you think is a great woman. You need to give your reasons for your choice.
Give students 3 minutes to do this task, and then ask some of them to speak out their choices. Teacher should give them some guide. For example, what is her ambition? What are the problems she met? And what are her sacrifices? After that the teacher can refer to the chart on Page 11 in the reference book. And then give them a brief summary about their discussion.
A sample summary:
As great women, they don’t care for themselves at all, and at some point or rather, they must give some sacrifices, just like Lin Qiaozhi, she devoted all her life to medical work for Chinese women and children and had chosen not to have a family of her own. Instead, she made sure that about 50,000 babies were safely delivered to their mothers. Not all people can do this. Once they have chosen their careers, they would carry on with them without any withdrawal. What they did is encouraging thousands of people to continue their careers. Those who are only famous but not great can’t be matched.
StepⅡReading
There are four tasks in this step:
a. Pre-reading to find the main idea of each paragraph.
b. Making a chart of the text structure.
c. Language points.
d. Comprehending.
Task 1 Pre-reading
There are 3 paragraphs in the text, and each one has its main idea. These main ideas support the title A protector of African wildlife. Teacher can give students some time to read the text quickly and find these main ideas to form a overview of the text.
T: How many paragraphs are there in the text?
Ss: Three.
T: What are the main ideas of theirs?
S1: The first paragraph is about a day in Combe National Park.
S2: The second one tells us how Jane Goodall did her research and the achievement she has made in her research.
S3: The third one tells us her influence to the world.
T: OK. Can we divide the text in this way? There are four paragraphs in the text. The first one is about a day in the park. The second one is her way of doing her research and some achievement. The third one is her attitude and feeling to the animals. And the last one is a short summary to her.
Ss: That’s right.
T: Thanks. Well, let’s draw a chart of the text together according to the main ideas we’ve found.
Task 2 Making a chart
A protector of African wildlife
↓
① ② ③
│ ∣ ∣
A day in the park Jane’s way to study chimps Her attitude to and her achievement the animals
↓
④
She has achieved everything she wanted to do.
Task 3 Language Points
T: By now, we have mastered the main idea and the details. Do you have some difficulties in the language?
S1: Yes. What does this sentence mean: “Watching a family of chimps wake up is our first activity of the day”?
T: Who’d like to help her?
S2: The subject of the sentence is a “V-ing form”, and the Predicate is “is” not “wake up”. So the meaning of the sentence is: 今天我们的第一件事是观察一个猩猩家庭的早起。
T: That’s right. Sometimes we should depend on the structure of the sentences to help us understand the meaning.
S3: Miss Wu, the sentence: “This means going back to a place where we left the chimp family sleeping in a tree the night before.” is beyond me.
T: This sentence is a little difficult. First, it includes an Attributive Clause. The clause is: where we left the chimp family sleeping in a tree the night before. Second, there are two structures in the sentence. One is “to mean doing”; the other is “leave ... doing”. For the first one, we can refer to the Appendices in Page 76. Now let’s look at the second one. In fact, there are several same structures in this text. Please look at these sentences.
Show the sentences on the screen:
1. ... where we left the chimp family sleeping in a tree the night before.
2. ... we see them go to sleep together in their nest for the night.
3. But the evening makes it all worthwhile.
4. ... was she allowed to begin her project.
5. ... Jane Goodall has been helping the rest of the world understand and respect the life of these animals.
T: Now look at the boldface（黑体字）. All the structures of the Predicates are Verb + Object + Object Complement. Let’s translate these sentences to taste the meaning and usage of Object Complement.
Ask some of the students to translate these sentences. Give them some explanations: When we use -ing form as Object Complement, it means this act is continuing. For example, Sentence 1. When we use -to do form as Object Complement, it means this process of the act has finished or to begin. We can take Sentence 2 and 4 for example. When we use an objective as Object Complement, it means that it shows us a kind of state. We can take sentence 3 and 5 for example. If possible, teacher still can give them more examples about this structure.
I heard the teacher call my name.
I will let you know the result of the voting as soon as possible.
We watch the children diving into the water from the top diving board.
Let’s go, let him alone.
S4: Miss Wu, I find this sentence a bit strange: Only after her mother came to help her for the first few months was she allowed to begin her project.
T: Yeah, this sentence uses the structure of inversion. The sign is that only phrase is placed at the beginning of the sentence. We will learn it later. Now it is Ok that you know the meaning of the sentence. Any questions?
Ss: No.
Task 4 Comprehending
T: Do you still have any questions? No? Ok, let’s finish next task. Read the text again and try to finish Exercise 1&2 in Page 3 as quickly as you can.
Give students some time to do this. After that, check the answers with the whole class.
Step Ⅲ Discussion
When we are guiding students to read something, besides hoping that they can learn some basic knowledge the material shows, we still hope they can learn something that can reflect the spirit of human being. This is the most important thing a teacher should show to students.
Ask students to work in groups of four and discuss the following questions:
1.What made her a great success?
2.What should we learn from Jane Goodall?
T: I think, there is not a single person who doesn’t admire success. But what is the way to succeed? Now we have read Jane Goodall, can you make sure what made her a great success, and what we should learn from her? Please discuss these two questions, and then some of you will report your opinions to all the class.
Give students some time to discuss.
T: Boys and girls, have you finished your discussion? How about your group?
G1: We think that there are two points that made her successful. One is her way to study chimps, and the other is her true love to the animals. The first one is facile (易做到的), because it is only a way. Everyone can do it. But for the second one, it is more easily said than done. As a woman, she gave up everything, went to the forest to study the chimps and devoted all her love to these animals. It is really not easy. What we cannot understand is that how she has such great personality.
T: These are very interesting questions. As far as I know, it is her relief that raised her personality. Everything is equal, no matter what they are. It isn’t because we are human being that we are superior to the other living thing. We don’t have any right to control other living thing. We all live on the same planet, they are our brothers or sisters. The only difference is that we have different shapes and have different wisdom. If you have the same love to the things around you, you can turn to be her. OK, how about the second question?
G2: At first, we admire she had the wisdom and courage to give up her chance to go to university and went to Africa to begin her own research. This makes us think over what we should think when we are choosing our majors or a university. Secondly, most of us think that man is the master of the world, because he is the most intelligent animal on the earth. So he can decide every thing he thinks right, including doing some experiments on animals, in spite of their pains. Jane not only saw this, but also tried her best to help them and argued for them to be left in the wild and not used for entertainment or advertisements. What she said in the text is very moving. It shows her deeply love to the animals. We should learn this from her. In fact, there are so much we should learn from her, her consideration, her hard work and so on.
StepⅣ Listening
Have a listening. Let students listen to the reading material, follow and repeat it, pay attention to the new words and expressions, as well as the sentence structures they have learned just now.
StepⅤ Homework
T: I’m very glad to hear what you said. You have learned what you should learn from Jane Goodall. And I believe you will be Jane Goodall, if you treat everything around you equally and show your love to them. Now time is up. Today’s homework is to finish the exercises in Page 4 and 5. Make some preparations for the next class. See you next time.
Ss: See you.
Grammar
Teaching goals
1. Target language
a. Important phrases.
achievement, inspire, worthwhile, observe, institute, respect , condition, argue, entertainment
b. Key sentences.
Our group are all going to visit the chimps in the forest
Our group includes six boys and five girls.
2.Ability goals
a. Enlarge vocabulary by learning word-formation.
b. Learn to use Subject-verb agreement correctly.
3.Learning ability goals
Teach students how to enlarge vocabulary by word-formation and how to use subject-verb agreement. Teaching important points
Noun Suffix in word-formation.
Subject-verb agreement of collective nouns.
Teaching difficult points
Enable students to use collective nouns correctly, by understanding their meanings in certain situations.
Teaching methods
Let students do the exercises, and then collect their answers. Ask them to conclude the rules and then give them some explanation.
Teaching aids
A projector.
Teaching procedures & ways
Step I Revision
Review the text by checking the answers for Exercises 2, 3 and 4 on Page 4 and 5. These exercises are about the useful words that appear in the text.
Step II Word-formation
There are two tasks in this part. One is leading in, in which teacher trys to give students as many words as possible. Let them guess the meanings of the words. The second one is to finish Exercise 1 on Page 4.
Derivation is one of the most important word-formation. It is helpful in enlarging students' vocabulary. Teachers can give them enough words, and let them guess the meaning of these words. As a result of this, students will be interested in the word-formation, and begin to use the method to guide their word study in their daily life.
T: Just now we reviewed some words in the text. Now please look at these words on the screen and say the meanings of them.
Organize Organization State Statement
Discuss Discussion Entertain Entertainment
Direct Direction Consider Consideration
Decide Decision Agree Agreement
Prepare Preparation Achieve Achievement
Inform Information Treat Treatment
Deter- Determination Improve Improvement
Express Expression Encourge Encouragement
Examine Examination Enjoy Enjoyment
Educate Education Govern Government
Feel Feeling Find Finding
Begin Beginning Mean Meaning
T: From the above chart we can see that with knowledge of word-formation, we can enlarge our vocabulary. Today, we'll focus our attention on the Noun Suffix. There are many Noun Suffixes in English. In this unit, we'll learn -ment, -ing, -ation, -ist and so on. Now let's finish Exercise 1 in Page 4.
Let students finish Exercise 1. Check their answers with the whole class.
T: Here are some other noun Suffixes on the screen. Read it and write down them in your note books. Noun Suffix
-er(fighter) -or(sailor) -ist(artist)
-ant(assistant) -ee(employee) -ian(librarian)
-tion(attention) -ment(government) -dom(freedom)
-ness(carefulness) -ism(socialism) -ship(friendship)
-ure(pleasure) -ty(society) -ence(reference)
Let students do it, and then check the answers with the whole class.
Step III Discovering useful structures
Tell students what they should do next. Ask them to read the EXAMPLE in Exercise 1 on Page 5. Make sure that they know what they should do. Finish Exercise 1, and check the answers.
T: Do you have any questions?
Ss: Sometimes it's difficult to decide whether the meaning of the subject tends to single or plurality. T: This is a good question. Although we know that if the word refers to different members, use a plural, and if the word is considered as a whole, use a singular verb, we still find it is difficult to use this in our practice. I think what we should do is to practice again and again. Try to experience the meaning of the word in the situation. That's the way to solve this problem. Ok, let's finish Exercise 2 on Page 5.
Let students do it. They can have a discussion to check the answers. After that, check with the whole class, to fact teacher should enlarge this structure for students. Die grammar chart in the reference book on Page 5, is a good one to let students know more about subject-verb agreement. If possible teacher could show all the grammar knowledge to students. This is especially useful for those who would like to learn English Grammar.
1．两个或两个以上做主语的单数名词用and连接，谓语用复数．
Tom and Dick _______ (be) good friends.
但若表示一个集合体时则用单数。
A singer and dancer ______ (be) present at the party.
The worker and writer ___ (be) talking to the students.
Bread and butter ________ (taste) good.
(a needle and thread, a horse and cart, a watch and chain, a coat and tie, truth and honesty, medical help and cure)
2．用 and 连接的两个名词若被 no, each, every, many a 修饰，则谓语动词用单数。
No bird and no beast ______ (be) seen in the bare island.
Many a boy and many a girl ______ (have) made such a funny experiment.
At Christmas each boy and each girl _____(be) given a present.
3．两个主语由not only…but also, or, either…or, neither…nor 等连接时，谓语动词与第二个主语保持一致．
Either he or I _____ (be) to go there.
______ (be) either you or he going to attend the meeting?
4.主语后有as well as, like, with, together with, but, except, besides,等，谓语应于前面主语保持一致．
A professor, together with some students, _____ (be) sent to help in the work.
No one but the teachers _____ (be) allowed to use the room.
5．一些集合名词做主语，如果看作一个整体，谓语动词用单数；如果指其中的成员，谓语用复数．如audience, committee，class(班级),crew（全体船员或机组人员), family, government, public(公众)等，
但people, police, cattle等只能用复数．
My family _____ (be) a big family.
My family _____ (be) listening to the radio.
The police ____ (be) trying to catch the thief.
6.通常作复数的集体名词
有些集体名词，如police, people, cattle, militia, poultry(家禽),)等，通常作复数，用复数动词。例如：
Domestic cattle ______(provide) us with milk, beef and hides.
7.通常作不可数名词的集体名词
有一些集体名词，如machinery, equipment, furniture, merchandise (商品)，clothing 通常作不可数名词，随后的动词用单数。例如：
The merchandise _____(have) arrived undamaged.
All the machinery in the factory ____ (be) made in China.
8．表示时间、重量、长度等名词，尽管是复数形式，但作为一个整体看，谓语还是用单数。
Five minutes ______ (be) enough.
One dollar and seventy eight cents _____ (be) what she has.
9. all 作为主语，代表人物时，一般用作复数；代表整个事件或情况时，一般 看作单数。
All that I want _____ (be) a good dictionary.
All ______ (be) silent. 人人都缄口无言。万籁俱寂。
All ______ (be) out of danger.
10．形容词加定冠词 the 表示一类人时，谓语动词用复数。
What a life the poor were living!
The young _____happy to give their seats to the old.
11．who, which, that 作定语从句的主语时，其谓语取决于先行词。
Those who want to go should sign your names here.
He is one of the students who have passed the exam.
He is the only one of the students who has passed the exam.
12. 以-ics结尾的学科名称
某些以-ics结尾的学科名称，如physics(物理学)、mathematics(数学)、mechanics(机械学)、politics(政治学)、statistics(统计学)、economics(经济学)、linguistics(语言学）athletics(体育学)、等，通常作单数用。例如：
13. 其他以-s结尾的名词
英语中有一些由两个部分组成的物体名称通常是以-s结尾，如scissors(剪子)，pincers(钳子)，glasses(眼镜），shorts(短裤)，trousers(裤子)，suspenders(吊裤带)等。这一类名词，如果不带“一把”、“一副”、“一条”等单位词而单独使用，通常作复数。例如：
如果带有单位词，则由单位词的单、复数形式决定动词的单、复数形式。 例如：One pair of scissors isn't enough.
14.以-s结尾的地理名称
某些以-s结尾的地理名称，如果是国名，如the United States, the United Nations, the Netherlands等，尽管带有复数词尾，但系单一政治实体，故作单数用。但若不是国名，而是群岛、山脉、海峡、瀑布等地理名称、通常作复数用。例如：
The West Indies, apart from the Bahamas, are commonly divided into two parts. The Himalayas（喜马拉雅山脉) have a magnificent variety of plant and animal life.
The Straits of Gibraltar have not lost their strategic importance.
15. 英语中还有一些以-s结尾的名词，如:
arms(武器), clothes(衣服), contents(内容，目录) fireworks(烟火), goods(货物), minutes(记录), morals(道德，品行), remains(遗体), stairs(楼梯), suburbs (郊区), thanks(谢意), wages(工资)等，
通常作复数。
16.凡是由-ings结尾的名词，如: clippings (剪下来的东西), diggings (掘出的东西), earnings (收入), filings (锉屑), lodgings (租住的房屋), surroundings (环境), sweepings (扫拢的垃圾) 等, 通常作复数用。例如：
The clippings of the hedges are usually burnt.
The sweepings of the godown(仓库) have been disposed of.
17. 还有一些以-s接的单、复数同形的名词，如: headquarters(总部), means(方法、手段), series(系列), species(种类), works(工厂)等，随后动词的单、复数形式取决于这些名称是作单数，还是用作复数。例如：
A headquarters was set up to direct the operation (指挥作战).
Their headquarters are in Paris.
The only means to achieve success is to appeal to arms (诉诸武力).
18. remains用于“遗体”意义时，随后的动词通常作复数：
His remains lie in the churchyard.
The martyr's remains were buried at the foot of the hill.
但作“遗迹”或“剩余物”解释时，可作复数或单数用：
Here is the remains of a temple.
The remains of the meal were/was fed to the dog.
19. 如果作主语的名词词组由“分数(或百分数)+of-词组”构成，其动词形式依of-词组中名词类别而定。例如：
Two thirds of the swampland(沼泽地) _____ (have) been reclaimed(开垦).
Over sixty per cent of the city ____ (be) destroyed in the war.
Thirty-five per cent of the doctors ______ (be) women.
20. 如果主语是all of ...,some of ...,none of ...,half of ...,most of ...等表示非确定数量的名词词组，其后的动词形式依of-词组中的名词类别而定。例如：
Most of the money _____ recovered by Deputy Player.
Most of the members ______ there.
All of the cargo ______ lost.
All of the crew ______ saved.
21.两数相减或相除，动词用单数；两数相加或相乘，动词可用单数，也可用复数。例如：
Forty minus fifteen (40-15) leaves twenty-five.
Forty divided by eight (40/8) is five.
Seven and five (7+5) makes/make twelve.
Five times eight (5+8) is /are forty.
22. 如果主语是由“a kind/sort/type of ,this kind/sort/type of +名词”构成，动词用单数。例如：
This kind of man annoys me.
但若在kind/sort/type之前的限定词是these/those,同时，of-词组中的名词又是复数，则动词用复数：
These kinds of men annoy me.
Those types/sorts of machines are up to date.
23.如果主语是由“many a+名词”或“more than one +名词”构成，其意义虽属多数，但随后的动词仍遵循“语法一致”原则，用单数。例如：
Many a man has done his duty.
More than one game was lost.
24. 1)由who, why, how, whether等wh-词引导的名词性分句作主语，其后的动词通常用单数。
2).两个由and连接的并列名词性分句作主语，如果主语表示两件事情，动词用复数。例如：
What caused the accident and who was responsible for it remain a mystery to us.
3). 以what-分句作主语的SVC结构
在以what-分句作主语的SVC结构中，主句补语是复数名词，如果主句谓语动词可用复数。
25. 1).在“one of+复数名词+关系分句”结构中，关系分句动词通常依照语法一致原则用复数形式。例如：
Joan is one of those people who go out of thier way to be helpful.
2). 在这类结构之前有定冠词the或者有the only 等限定词和强调词时，关系分句动词形式依one而定，用单数。例如：
Selfishness is the one of her many faults which defeats itself.
Listening
Teaching goals
1. Target language
Men have more chances to get to the top of their career than women.
Why did Joan have to dress up as a man to become a solider?
2. Ability goals
Enable students to know something about Joan and let students realize women can be the same success as men and know something about the International Campaign to Ban landmines.
3. Learning ability goals
Help students learn how to get required information by listening.
Teaching important and difficult points
Train to get the key words by reading the questions before listening.
Teaching methods
Instruction and practice.
Teaching aids
A recorder.
Teaching procedures & ways
Step I Revision
T: Pleased to meet you again!
Ss: Me, too.
T: Zhao, why do you look so tired?
S; He stayed up yesterday.
T: Why?
S: Don't listen to him. I just have had a cold.
T: You'd better, have some thicker clothes. The weather is rather cold these days.
S: Thank you, Miss Wu.
T;: Now, let's begin our class. Have you finished your homework?
Ss: Yes.
T: Well, now I'll show you answers on the screen. Check your answers by yourselves. If you have any questions, please let me know. After doing this, teachers can continue the next step.
Step II Listening to the material on Page 7
There are three tasks in this step: the first listening, the second listening and the third listening. Teachers should ask students to glance the whole exercises before listening, so that they can realize what is the main task in listening.
Task 1 The first listening
T: Hello, everyone! Glad to meet you. These days the topic we are talking is important women & great women. We know women can achieve the same as
men. But they have many difficulties in doing this. Today we'll have three listening materials to listen. The first one tells us some particular problems, which women have when they want a career of their own. The structure of this material is very clear. It is organized by the first, second and third paragraph. So when you listen for the first time, try to get the general idea of the material and think which sentences are the main ideas of the three paragraphs. Now let's listen for the first time. Play the tape for the first time for students to get the main ideas of the paragraphs. And then ask students to try to retell what they have heard. It doesn't matter whether they
are some details, such as words or sentences, or they are some main ideas. Because the purpose of doing this is to let students know they have caught some information. Everything is OK.
Collect what they have heard and write down them on the blackboard. Teachers can let them discuss which are main ideas and which are details.
Task 2 The second listening
There are two purposes in this task. One is to let students finish Exercise 2; the other is to let students get some useful information to finish Exercise 1 and 3. So after the discussion, teachers can let students look through the Exercises on Page 7 in order to catch the useful information to finish the exercises when they are listening. Then play the tape again, and try to finish Exercise 1&2. Exercise 1 is about some details. Exercise 2 is about the main ideas of each paragraph. Teacher can make a pause, and repeat it where the main ideas appear to make sure students can catch it.
Task 3 The third listening
This is a good chance for students to check their answers. After listening twice, most students can have a good understanding about the material, and can write down the answers mostly. So this time is for their checking and adding their answers.
If they still have some difficulties, play the tape for the fourth time to meet their needs.
Step III The listening material on Page 41
Teacher can ask students to guess the content of the material, according to the questions in exercises. And then have a listening and finish the exercises. The steps of the listening are the same with the above one.
Step IV Listening material on Page 44
This is a short dialogue between Jody Williams and a journalist. If students want to know something about the dialogue, they must pay attention to the questions. Ex 2 in the Listening Task offers some information. They can guide students to get what they are required to get. So it is necessary to tell students to read the chart carefully ahead, and then listen to the tape. Students can write down some notes instead of the whole sentences.
Step V Homework
T: Today, we learned something about women. I believe what they did and what they are facing may give us some inspirations. For girls we should believe that although we may face some difficulty, we are able to try our best to realize our dreams. OK, today's homework is to read the article A GOOD EXAMPLE FOR ME and make some preparations for the speaking in Page 7. That's all for today, bye, everyone.
Ss: Bye, teacher.
For most students it is difficult to finish all the three listening materials in one class. So teachers can make one of them as homework, let students listen to it after class.
篇11：模块一 1-5单元练习答案 一单元 (新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
模块一 1-5单元练习答案
一单元
单词过关
1）Loose 2） crazy 3）gestures 4） ignore 5） concern
6 settled 7）dusk 8）teenagers 9）tips 10）upset
重点词汇转换
1）unreasonable; reasoning; reasons 2）ignored; ignorant; ignorance
3）sufferings; sufferer; insufferable 4）agreement; agreeable; disagreed
5）recovery; recoverable; recover 6）addition; additional; added
7）communicative; communicate; communication
8）purpose; purposelessly concerned; 9）concern; concerns 10）Germans; Germany; German
词组积累
1）add up 2） has trouble 3） took no notice of 4）face to face 5）on purpose
6）are concerned about 7）to do with 8）fell in love with 9） no longer 10） have gone through
重要句型
1) I didn’t find out that I forgot to bring my wallet until I got to the department store.
Not until I got to the department store did I find out that I forgot to bring my wallet.
It was not until I got to the department store that I found out I forgot to bring my wallet.
2) She didn’t burst out into tears until her husband went out of sight.
Not until her husband went out of sight did she burst out into tears.
It was not until her husband went out of sight that she burst out into tears.
1) That was the fifth time that I had left for Guangzhou for study.
2) This is the first time that I have had the chance to talk with you face to face.
其它
1 add … to / added to / added up to
2 on the point of / by…points / pointing at /pointed …at
3 As far as English is concerned / is concerned about / concern / concerned / concerning
4 D / A / share … with / shares 5 B / D/ for
6 went through / get through / gone through / gone through / get through
7 attend / join…in / joining / took part in / joined / join / attended / attend
8 把…收起来 / 储存 / 放弃 / 抛弃
9 It is the first time that she has talked with an English man / Every time I see him ,he is always preparing his lessons. 10 B / C / D / A
2单元
单词过关
1）Including 2） present 3）commanded 4）requesting 5）recognized 6）government 7） However 8）Impolite 9）direction 10） modern
重点词汇转换
1）Included 2）directed, director 3）presence 4） modernization 5） nation
6）useless, 7） use 8）Useless 9）actually 10） rapid
词组积累
1）Luck played an important part / role in his success.
2）The play, (which is) based on a true story, is very instructive.
3）John didn’t attend the meeting because of his illness.
4）Make good use of every chance (that) you have to practise speaking English.
5）The number of the students (who are) absent today is five
重要句型
1) Inspired by the teacher, I work harder than ever before.
2) This winter it is colder than ever before.
1) He is absent from school today. This is because he is ill.
2) I didn’t oblige you to finish it on time. This is because I didn’t want to put too much pressure on you.
1) Even if you don’t like him, you can still be polite.
2) Even if you don’t want to go, you should tell him that.
其它
1 didn’t recognize / recognized / as 2 C/ B / in one direction / under my direction 3 should be shut / D 4 D / A / A
5 B / including… included / cover / containing 6 A / presented …to
7 A/ C 8 come up to / came up / came up with / came across / came about 9 because / because of / as a result / resulted in / resulted from
10 is made / make of 11 as / where / as / that/ 12 why / because / that / why / why
三单元
单词过关
1）Journal 2） transport 3）stubborn 4）insist 5）proper
6）determines 7）attitude 8）familiar 9）record 10）persuaded
重点词汇转换
1）transportation/ transporting 2）final 30persuasion 4）determination
5）cyclists6）bravery 7）topics 8） shorts 9） properly10）Tibetant
词组积累
1）dreams about 2）care about 3）giving in 4）get, interested in
5）For one thing, for another
重要句型
1) It was under the tree that I picked up the wallet.
2) Was it he who/ that broke the glass of the window?
3) Why was it that you didn’t attend the meeting?
An American guest is giving English lecture in the hall this afternoon.
其它
1．imagine …marrying 2 B 3 C / D / persuaded … not to walk
4 D/ D 5 A / was determined to 6 D / fun
7 wake / awake / awake /awake
8 give up / gave away / give in / gives in / gave out / gave out
9 B/ B /A 10 care about / care for / care for / care about
11 took /spent / cost /paid /spending /paid / cost / cost /cost
四单元
单词过关
1）cracks2）nervous 3）injured 4）organizing 5）destroyed 6）shaking 7）covered8）rescued 9）fresh10）Judging
重点词汇转换
1）nation; national; national 2）dirt; dirty 3）injury; injured; injured 4）Judging; judge; judgement 5） Electricity; electrified; electric; electrified
6）is reported; reporters; report 7） ruins; was ruined; ruined smell; 8）smell; smelly
9）survivors; survive; survival 10）honoured; honour; honourably
词组积累
1）in ruins 2）to shake hands with3）Instead of4）Judging from
5）are proud of6）putting up7）is known as8）in honour of
9）give out 10）woke up
重要句型
1) Who do you think has taken my umbrella?
2) When do you think we should make our plan?
It seems that he has never thought about such a problem.
He seems not to have thought about such a problem.
It happened that all of us were working outdoors.
All of us happened to be working outdoors.
其它
1）dreamed of 2）give up 3）insist on 4）determined to 5）change his mind
5单元
单词过关
1）Quality 2）willing, trouble3）heart4）principle 5）peaceful, peace
6）sentenced, prison7）period, law, lawyer8）advises 9）continued
10）position 11）accept12）violence 13）equal 14）blanket
15）educated, cruelty
重点词汇转换
1）heroine; heroicly; heroic 2）cruel; cruelly; cruelty 3）qualities; qualified
4）will; willing; will 5）Equal; equal; equally; equality
6）peace; peacefully; peaceful 7）crime; criminal; crime
8）violently; violence; violent 9）acceptable; accept; acceptance
10）terror; terrible; terrify
词组积累
1）lose heart 2）in trouble 3）worrying about 4）out of work 5）be free from
6）as a matter of fact 7）blew up 8）was put in prison 9）came to power
10）set up 11）was sentenced to 12）be equal to
重要句型
1) 1993 saw the foundation of our school.
2) This village has ever seen a disaster.
1) Only after you’ve met with such a thing will you believe it.
2) Only in such a family can you live such a happy life.
其它
一单元
1. After the serious poisoning of Sanlu milk powder was exposed to the public, parents become even more concerned about what their children could eat.
2. A best friend is someone who can share happiness and sorrow with you.
3. I’m grateful for your advice, which has helped me get along well with my classmates.
4. This is the first time he has used e-mail to communicate with his pen pal.
5. While we were playing at the swimming pool, the naughty boy pushed me into the water on purpose.
6. A hobby is something that you never get tired of-the more time you devote to it, the more fun you have.
7. Computer makes it possible for people to talk face to face even if they are in different parts of the world, which has entirely changed our life.
8. Every time I met a series of difficult problems in the exams, the first step I took was to ask myself to calm down.
9. According to the news report, it is the weather that will determine the exact launch time of Shenzou Seven.
10. In order to realize his dream of being a champion, he has suffered great hardship over the past ten years.
2单元
1. At present, more than one million visitors travel to Guangzhou every year.
2. Their relationship was based upon years of open communication with each other.
3. We must make good use of the resources we have now.
4. We should take an active part in community service, which can enrich our life.
5. Believe it or not, we have gradually become able to express ourselves fluently in English.
6. Actually, there are a number of ways to learn English well, such as by recitation and reading.
7. Even if it takes me six weeks, I am determined to finish the job.
8. Because of the heavy rain, there are traffic jams everywhere.
9. The government should come up with a better solution to the problems caused by the high price of petrol.
10. All students are requested to attend the meeting to be held tomorrow and to get there on time.
三单元
1 .Jack gave me a determined look, which showed me that he would neither change his mind nor give in.
2. John, think of ways to get this room tidied up.
3. He kept persuading me to take him for company if I had a tour.
4. Although she was not fond of paintings, she insisted that she (should) go to the exhibition with me.
5. It took one week to transport the food, clothes and medicine to the disaster-hit area.
6. We thought that Paul was a reliable man, but actually he only cares about himself.
7. It was your cousin who first had the idea to cycle along the river from where it begins to where it ends.
8. Because his car was damaged he received RMB1000 from the insurance company.
9. My sister is so stubborn that she won’t listen to any suggestion.
10. Please be patient. The train is arriving in ten minutes.
四单元1. It seems that his career is at an end.
2. It is reported that the number of smokers in our city has reached one million.
3. I wondered how the survivors were rescued.
4. Sixty percent of the travelers prefer to live in the rooms whose windows face south.
5. His job was gone but not all the hope was lost.
6. The school will organize the students to dig out a channel and plant trees around the playground.
7. The firefighters thought little of their personal safety and as usual rescued the people who were trapped in the fire.
8. China , with a population of 1.3 billion, faces the Pacific on the east.
9. The rescuers were too tired to move and fell asleep in the ruins.
10.He burst into tears, rushing out of the door to seek help.
5单元
1. Some people managed to escape from the burning building by breaking down the doors.
2. Since I was better educated, I got a job working in an office.
3. After getting up, he always drinks a glass of water, which he believes is good for his health.
4. I knew him when we were in primary school- as a matter of fact we were in the same grade.
5. Mother Teresa has devoted all her life to caring for the poor.
6. The house , in front of which there are two trees, was the place he used to live in.
7. After Mandela came to power and became president, his government did their best to change the unfair situation for black people.
8. He is begging me to let him join the club we have just set up.
9. As this couple were out of work, they had to turn to their relatives for help.
10. John wanted to give 100 yuan as a reward to the taxi driver who had found his wallet.
Unit One Friendship
1. add up add up to add sth. to sth. 2. calm down 3. be concerned about 4. have got to (do sth.) 5. go through 6. hide away
7. a series of 8. set down 9. suffer from
10. get along (well) with 11. fall in love 12. be crazy about / on
13. be crazy for 14. according to 15. join in
16. so … that… 17. face to face 18. on purpose
Unit 2 English Around The World
1. play an important part/ role in 2. because of 3. in some ways
4. native language 5. even if/though 6. communicate with sb
7. be based on 8. be present at 9. come up
10.get/be close to 11.make use of 12.a large number of
13.the number of 14.such as 15.believe it or not
16.have fun 17.make a request 18.give commands
19.solve problems 21. an English- speaking country
Unit 3 Travel Journal
1. dream of/about doing sth 2. graduate from… 3. persuade sb to do sth
4. persuade sb not to do sth 5. arise one’s interest in sth 6. the best way to do sth
7. insist on doing sth 8. insist (that) sb (should) do sth 9. change one’s mind
10. at an altitude of… 11. make up one’s mind to do sth
12.give in to sb 13. pass through deep valleys
14. as usual 15.encourage sb to do sth 16.make camp
17.put up a tent 18.can hardly wait to do sth
19.For one thing,…..For another,…. 20.be familiar with … 21.be familiar to sb
22.set a record 23.break a record 24.record sth
25.say “Hello” to sb 26.see the world through somebody else’s eyes
Unit 4 Earthquakes
1. shake hands 2. as usual 3. break out
4. right away 5. a number of 6. to the north of
7. put up 8. be proud of 9. judging from
10.be known as 11.come out of 12.too---to---
13.give out 14.be trapped under the ruins 15.instead of
16.in honour of 17.tens of thousands of 18.more than
19.fall down 20.at an end 22. dig out
Unit 5 Nelson Mandela-a modern hero
1. put …into prison 2. in fact, as a matter of fact, 3. fight against
4. come to power 5. break the law 6. without pay
7. lose heart 8. be active in 9. be willing to do something
10. be out of work 11. be stopped from doing something
12. answer violence with violence 13. show somebody over some place
14. be in good health 15. blow up 16. ask for
17. be in trouble 18. die for 19. advise somebody to do something
20. in reward for 21. set up 22. be sentenced to
一单元
单词过关
重点词汇转换
词汇积累
重要句型
其它
篇12：模块一 1-5单元练习答案一单元 (新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
模块一 1-5单元练习答案
一单元
单词过关
1）cultural 2） remains 3)belonging 4)search 5)designed, style
6)gift, return 7)mirror 8)wonder 9)doubt 10）furniture
11）property, secretly 12）considered, evidence, proved 13）opinion, apart 14) pretend 15)highly
词组积累
1.To tell the truth 2.in search of 3.think highly of 4.in return
5.be taken away 6.were at war 7.insisted on 8.agree with
9.look into 10.was made into
重要句型
1) Surely it will take you much time to master English.
2) It took him nearly 3 years to collect their criminal evidence.
1) Some researchers believe that there is no doubt that a cure for AIDS will be found.
2) There is no doubt that he is qualified for the job.
2单元
单词过关
1.honest 2.ancient, compete 3.interview 4.admitted 5.stadium
6.gymnasium 7.replace 8.physical 9.relate 10.advertise
11.foolish 12.promised 13.athletes, gold, medals
词组积累
1.to take turns 2.every four years 3.had no chance 4.take part in
5.Make sure 6.one after another 7.plays an important role
8.Related to 9.have heard of 10.was admitted into
重要句型
1) He used to be addicted to stories about martial arts. However, he has mended his ways and studies hard now.
2) My mother used to ask me what is the most important part of the body.
1) They said goodbye, little knowing that they were never to meet again.
2) You are to do your homework before you watch TV
三单元
单词过关
1.common 2.calculators 3.simple瞞inded 4.artificial, intelligence
5.advantages, disadvantages 6.choice 7.Personally, disagree
8.materials 9.coach 10.wander
词组积累
1.After all 2.make up 3.with the help of 4.deal with
5.have made a decision 6.was watching over 7.In my opinion
8.In fact 9.in a way 10.going by
重要句型
1) He works so hard that he can finish the work on time.
2) We got up so early as to catch the first train.
=We got up so early that we caught the first train.
=We got up early so that we caught the first train.
1) There were times when Brian called on his grandpa.
2) There were times when my sister who was 10 at the time, had to look after us.
四单元
单词过关
1.protect, enemies 2.stomachs 3.apply, government, permission
4.suggested 5.contains, including 6.Mosquitoes, insect
7.affected 8.attention 9.butterflies 10.powerful
词组积累
1.is dying for 2.be applied to 3.at a loss 4.hunted for
5.result in 6.in danger of 7.were concerned about
8.comes into being 9.in peace 10.have a bad effect on
重要句型
1) With the boy leading the way, we had no trouble in getting to
the station.
2) The weather was even colder with the wind blowing.
1) I have to move to different classrooms for different classes. As a result, it is difficult to remember all the faces and names.
2) The wall had caused great losses on the wealth and human life of the country. As a result, an angry population rose up in rebellion against the Qin Dynasty.
5单元
单词过关
1.dreamed, clapping 2.honest 3.formed 4.passers-by, earn, extra
5.jokes 6.loosely 7.advertisement 8.attractive, fans
9.instruments 10.broke 11.performance 12.saying
13.stick 14.reputation 15.ability
词组积累
1.be honest with 2.have gone wrong 3.has formed the habit
4.play jokes on 5.came up with 6.by chance
7.be confident in 8.sort out 9.based on 10.Above all
重要句型
1) It is curious that she left without saying goodbye.
2) Lots of students are already doing it without realizing it.
1) You must solve the problem at once before it becomes too serious.
2) Grandpa passed away before he had time to tell me the secret.
一单元
单词过关
重点词汇转换
词汇积累
重要句型
其它
篇13：高一必修1（模块1）句型必背(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Unit1--5句型背诵
1) I wonder if it’s because I haven’t been able to be outdoors for so long that I’ve grown so crazy about everything to do with nature.（强调句）
我不知道这是不是因为我长久无法出门的缘故，我变得对一切与大自然有关的事物都无比狂热。
2) It was the first time in a year and a half that I had seen the night face to face. （从句时态用完成时）
这是我一年半以来第一次目睹夜晚。
3) Your friend, who doesn’t work hard, asks you to help him cheat in the end-of-term exam.（非限制性定语从句）
你的一个朋友叫你在期末考试中帮他作弊，这个朋友平常不认真学习。
4) I stayed awake on purpose until half past eleven one evening in order to have a good look at the moon for once by myself.
有一天晚上，我熬到11点半故意不睡觉，为的是独自好好看看月亮一次。
5) If you have some trouble (in) getting along with your friends, you can write to the editor and ask for advice.
如果你在和朋友的相处上有问题，你可以写信给编辑向他征求建议。
6) Add up your score and see how many points you can get.
把你的得分加起来，看看得了多少。
7) What he did has added to our difficulties.
他的所作所为增加了我们的困难。
8) His income adds up to $1000 a month.
他每月的收入共计1000美元。
9) According to Anne, a true friend is a person whom you can trust and share your happiness and sorrow with.（定语从句）
安妮认为真正的朋友是一个你能信任、能与你共患难的人。
10) Why is she so concerned about his attitude to her work?
她为什么那么关注他对她的工作的看法？
11) The police asked him to set down what he had seen in a report.
警察让他在报告中写下他所看见的事情。
12) As I was about to go out and search for him, he happened to come in.
正当我打算出去找他时，他恰巧进来。
13) Mr. Jones lives alone and often feels lonely.
琼斯先生单独一人生活，常常感到孤独。
14) We tried to calm him down, but he kept crying.
我们试图让他平静下来，但他仍不停地哭着。
15) Does he dare (to) go out at night in such stormy weather?
他敢在这样一个暴风雨夜外出吗？
16) He would go through fire and water for his country.
他愿为国家赴汤蹈火。
17) That country suffered a heavy loss in the flood.
那个国家在水灾中遭受严重的损失。
18) World Englishes come from those countries where English plays an important role as a first or second language, either because of foreign rule or because of its special role as an international language.（定语从句）
世界英语来自那些以英语为第一或第二语言的国家，英语在这些国家起重要作用或是因为外国的统治，或是因为其作为国际语言的特殊地位。
19) All languages change when cultures communicate with one another.
当不同的语言互相沟通时，所有的语言都会发生变化。
20) Actually, the English spoken between about AD 450 and 1150 was based more on German than present day English.
实际上，从公元450年到1150年，人们所说的英语更多的是以德语为基础的，而现代英语不是。
21) Would you please come up to my flat for a visit?
请到我的公寓里来坐坐，好吗？
22) Believe it or not, he cheated in the exams.
信不信由你，他在考试中作弊。
23) Native English speakers can understand each other even if they don’t speak the same kind of English.
以英语作为母语的人，即使他们所讲的语言不尽相同，也可以互相交流。
24) Today the number of people learning English in China is larger than even before.
目前在中国学习英语的人数比以往任何时候都多。
25) It is the duty of a government to provide education for the children of its country. （it作形式主语）
政府的责任是为其国家的小孩提供教育。
26) Reading is one of the best ways of improving your vocabulary and usage.
阅读是帮助你改善词汇及其用法的最好方法之一。
27) Giving commands is less polite than making a request.
发号命令比发出请求粗鲁。
28) We asked her for directions and she told us to go round the corner on the left and keep going straight for two blocks.
我们向她问路，她告诉我们往左边拐弯后直走两个街区。
29) He knows several languages, such as English, French and German.
他懂几种语言，例如英语、法语和德语。
30) My sister and I have dreamed about cycling along the Mekong River from where it begins to where it ends.
我姐姐和我一直梦想要沿湄公河从源头到终点骑车旅行。
31) The man insisted that he didn’t steal anything and he (should) be set free at once. (陈述语气、虚拟语气)
这男人坚持自己没有偷东西，他坚持说他应该立刻被释放。
32) She gave me a determined look – the kind that said she wouldn’t change her mind.
她给了我一个坚定的眼神--这种眼神表明她是不会改变主意的。
33) He is so stubborn that no one can persuade him to do anything.
他是如此的固执以致没有人能说服他做任何事。
34) My sister doesn’t care about details.
我的姐姐是不会考虑细节的。
35) She is a determined woman. Once she determines to do something, she will do it well.
她是个意志坚强的人。如果她下决心做什么事，就一定要做好。
36) He recorded the important events ad his afterthoughts in his travel journal.
在旅行日记中，他记下了重大的事件及自己的想法。
37) I am not familiar with this city, because this is my first visit.
我对这个城市不熟悉，因为这是我的第一次来访。
38) I don’t think it is necessary for us to give in.
我认为我们没有必要让步。
39) The topics of a travel journal can be different from a diary, often including people, things, and events less familiar to readers.
游记的主题可以和日记不同，经常包括那些读者不太熟悉的人和事。
40) It was great fun to put up tents here.
在这儿搭帐篷真好玩。
41) The number of people who were killed or injured in the earthquake reached more than 400,000.（定语从句）
死伤的人数达到40多万。
42) The army organized the rescue workers to dig out those who were trapped and to bury the dead. （定语从句）
部队组织救援人员将受困的人们挖出来，将死者掩埋。
43) All hope was not lost. = Not all hope was lost.（部分否定）
不是所有的希望都破灭了。
44) None of us were allowed to go there.（全部否定）
我们全都不许去那里。
45) He rescued the man from drowning.
他救了一男子使之免遭溺毙。
46) An earthquake left the whole city in ruins.
地震过后，全城到处是残垣断壁。
47) I feel highly honoured by your trust.
得到你的信任，我感到非常荣幸。
48) Professor Yu organized his thoughts before giving the speech.
于教授在演讲之前组织了一下思路。
49) Many people took shelter from the rain in the department store.
许多人在百货公司里避雨。
50) It seemed that the world was at an end as the earthquake destroyed nearly everything.
世界似乎到了末日，因为地震几乎毁了一切。
51) People began to wonder how long the disaster would last.
人们开始纳闷，这场灾难还会持续多久？
52) They used candles all the time instead of electricity.
他们一直用蜡烛，没有用电。
53) The one million people of the city, who thought little of these strange events, went to bed as usual that night.（非限制性定语从句）
这城市的一百万居民几乎都没有把这些奇怪的情况当一回事，当天晚上照常上床睡觉了。
54) We’d better prepare him for the bad news.
我们最好让他做好知道这个坏消息的心理准备。
55) The rubbish gave out a smelly gas.
垃圾发出一阵臭味。
56) I am getting in touch with him right away.
我马上跟他联系。
57) Are you willing to do public service work without pay?
你愿意无偿从事公益活动吗？
58) Do you easily lose heart when you are in trouble?
你处于不幸中时容易丧失信心吗？
59) The time when I first met him was a very difficult period of my life.
第一次见到他的时候是在我一生中非常艰难的时期。（定语从句）
60) It is a doctor’s job to advise patients on health problems.
医生的职责就是向病人提供有关健康的建议。
61) As a matter of fact, I was worried about whether I would be out of work.
事实上我担心我是不是会失业。
62) After getting up, he always drinks a glass of water, which he believes is good for his health. （非限制性定语从句）
每天起床后，他都喝一杯水，他认为这对他的身体有好处。
63) The last thirty years have seen the greatest number of laws stopping our rights and progress, until today we have reached a stage where we have almost no rights at all. （定语从句）
过去30年来所出现的大量法律剥夺我们的权利，阻挡我们的进步，一直到今天，我们还处在几乎什么权利都没有的阶段。
64) In his life, he has always tried to help those who are less fortunate than himself. （定语从句）
在他的一生中，他总是设法帮助那些比他不幸的人。
65) Only then did we decide to answer violence with violence.（倒装句）
只有到这个时候我们才决定用暴力反抗暴力。
66) Only some of the children seemed to have understood it.
似乎只有一部分孩子明白。
67) The school where I studied only two years was three kilometers away.
那所我仅仅读了两年的学校有三公里远。（定语从句）
68) The parts of town where they lived were places decided by white people.（过去分词作后置定语）
他们在城里的住宅区都是由白人决定的。
69) Before he came to power, he was once put in prison for years.
在掌权之前，他曾经坐了几年牢。
70) This was my reward after working all my life for equal rights for the Blacks.
这是我毕生为争取黑人的平等权利而斗争所得到的回报。
71) He was sentenced to three years in prison for stealing.
他因偷窃被判处三年监禁。
72) He set up a black law firm to help those poor black people.
他开设了一间黑人律师事务所帮助那些穷苦的黑人。
73) In 1963, I helped him blow up some government buildings.
在1963年，我帮助他炸毁了一些政府大楼。
74) My family could not continue to pay my school fee.
我的家庭无法继续支付我的学费。
75) He taught us during the lunch breaks and the evenings when we should have been asleep.（虚拟语气）
在午餐的休息时间和晚上我们本应该睡觉的时候他教授我们。
篇14：M5U2 The environment Reading(新课标版高一英语必修四教案教学设计)
课前导学
1.预习：Part A
2.重要短语：
1). 消减；缩减；减少___________ 2) 自由发言___________
3）原材料___________ 4）用尽___________
5）对…担心___________ 6）只要___________
7）砍到___________ 8）四处打听___________
3.根据课文内容完成下面的表格：
Speakers Lin Shuiqing
( a1._________ from the
Green Society ) Qian Liwei
( a business development
2.______________)
Points
Economic development is bad for the 3.___________
A healthy environment and development should be 4._________ at the same time.
5._______________
Large areas of the world are damaged by chemical 6.______________.
People suffer from air and water pollution.
Much sea life being 7._________ by fishing boats.
Many factories and industries control the amount of pollution they produce.
They are careful to spend money 10.__________ any damage they cause.
The people 11.__________ these factories are concerned about the environment.
Suggestions
8._______ back on production and reducing the amount of things people make and buy.
Thinking more about 9.__________ our waste.
Teaching people ways of living that do not harm the environment.
Producing more things from
12.________ that have been recycled.
Better 13._________ to preserve the environment.
Paying higher 14.________ for polluting the environment.
4. 根据Reading部分的课文内容选择正确答案：
(1)Mr. Qian Li wei approves of the following points except _________.
A.large amounts of fish are being caught by fishing boats before they can lay eggs.
B.People are more important than fish and trees.
C.We should produce more things from recycled products.
D.We need more effective laws to preserve the environment, which still allow the economy to grow.
(2)Which of the following statements can suggest that we can achieve a balance between the economy and environment ?
A.Many people are willing to pay slightly higher prices for things that are environmentally friendly.
B.Many people, old and young, are doing their best to protect their surroundings.
C.Our country has passed the law that factories which pollute the environment should have to pay higher taxes.
D.All of the above.
教学过程
词汇讲解
1. debate vi./n. 辩论，争辩，争论
debate with sb. about/on sth._____________ hold a debate ___________
beyond debate ______________ under debate ___________
1)We are _______________or not to have a trip this summer. 我们盘算着今年夏天是否去旅游。
2) She debated with herself for a while, and then picked up the phone.
辨析debate/ argue/ discuss
debate 指正式辩论，着重双方“各抒己见”
argue 着重“说理，争论”和“企图说服”
discuss 着重“讨论，磋商”
3) We ____________with the waiter about the price of the meal. 我们跟服务员争执那顿饭的钱。
4) Have you _________ the problem with anyone? 你与谁商量过这个问题？
5) We _________ the proposal for three days. 那个建议我们辩论了三天
2. operate
The doctor operated on the baby’s throat.
What skills are needed to operate this machine?
Illegal drinking clubs continue to operate in the city.
Soldiers cannot operate effectively without good food.
拓展：
operating system _____________ operating table_____________
perform an operation on _____________ in operation _____________
put/ bring sth into operation _____________ come/ go into operation _____________
3. credit 荣誉，赞扬；信用，信赖;名声，信誉;赊账，信用贷款；学分
He deserves credit for what he has done for the city.
Your honesty does you great credit / does great credit to you.
We gave credit to his story.
George has credit with his teacher.
He is a man of great credit in our town.
Greatly to his credit, he won the prize.
I bought the dishwasher on credit.
He hasn’t enough credits to get his degree.
4. responsibility
We have responsibility for protecting them.
You must take responsibility for what you have done.
Mike is responsible for the whole project.
5. cut back on
To save money, we should cut back on our spending.
Many companies are cutting back on staff at the moment.
If we cannot sell more, we will have to cut back on production.
6. use up / run out/ run out of
Don’t use up all the milk. We need some for breakfast.
Her money soon ran out.
She is always running out of money before payday.
难句分析
1.With me are Ms Lin Shuiqing, from the Green Society, and Mr Qian Liwei, a business development consultant.(P22 Line5)
【句式研习】 该句是一个______句，由于主语 “Ms Lin Shuiqing, from the Green Society, and Mr Qian Liwei, a business development consultant” 较长，为了避免句子___________，往往把介词短语 或其他成分提到句首。
【归纳拓展】
1）当句首状语为方位词，且谓语动词为go,come等表示位置转移的动词时句子须倒装。
翻译：飞机飞高了。______________________________
翻译：主席进来了，会议开始了。________________ and the meeting began.
2) 当句首状语为表示地点的介词词组时，句子须倒装。
翻译： 一个身材高大的警察从拐角处走来。__________________________________
2. The world’s population has grown by six times what it was in 1800. (P22, Line 19)
【句式研习】倍数表达法
This box is four times as light as that box.
The cotton output was four times greater than that of .
The Earth is 49 times the size of the Moon.
3. As a business development consultant, I’m often seen as being against the environment. (P23, Line 29)
【句式研习】本句中as 是______词，用来谈论________________________________.
As an interviewer, you ought to sit back and listen.
She spoke of him as her dearest friend.
比较：
As I left the house, I remembered my keys.
It is very difficult for us to know what to do, as we are not his parents.
I did as he asked.
Poor as he was, he was happy.
4. What I’m here to say is that having worked with many environmental consultants, I know that a healthy environment and development should be possible at the same time. （P23 Line34）
【句式研习】本句中what 引导一个________从句作__________,第一个that引导的______从句；在_______从句中，know后的that 引导了_______从句，而现在分词短语having worked with many environmental consultants作________状语。
5. The people operating these factories are deeply concerned about the environment. (P23, Line 37)
【句式研习】本句中operating these factories作________, 用来_________________，相当于一个________从句。
There is a piano standing （= which ________）in the corner.
A man respecting others (= who _______________) will himself be respected.
Can you see the star moving (=that _____________) in the sky?
6.Asking around, I find many people willing to pay a little higher prices for things that are friendly to the environment. （P22 Line51）
【句式研习】 本句中asking around 为现在分词短语作_______， willing to pay…things 为形容词短语作___________, that 引导________从句，修饰________,其中that 在______从句中作 _______。
反馈矫正
1. It’s here that the river f__________ down into the see.
2. The company is famous for the p__________ of small cars.
3. As we all know, he is g_________ for money.
4. It is his r_______ to make arrangements for the meeting.
5. Are you w________ that he should be admitted into our club?
6. He deserves c__________ for what he has done for the city.
7. He stated his b_________ that evolution occurred through natural selection.
8. I paid $1,000 in t________ last year.
9. I’ll c________ my teacher about the problem.
10. These fish are often eaten r_______.
迁移创新
1. The top leaders of the two countries are holding talks in a friendly __________.
A. atmosphere B. state C. situation D. phenomenon
2. Peter’s jacket looked just the same as Jack’s, but it cost ________ his.
A. as much twice as B. twice as much as
C. much as twice as D. as twice much as
3. I was just talking to Margaret when Jackson _________.
A. cut in B. cut down C. cut out D. cut up
4. It’s helpful to put children in a situation ______ they can see themselves differently.
A. that B. when C. which D. where
5. I would appreciate _____ if you come to my grandma’s birthday party and say “Hello” to her.
A. that B. it C. you D. one
6. - I’m still working on my project.
- Oh, you’ll miss the deadline. Time is ________.
A. running out B. going out C. giving out D. losing out
7. As these new products are not selling well, the members of the board have decided to _______production.
A. cut down B. cut down to C. cut back on D. cut off
8. ________ we move the picture over there? Do you think it will look better?
A. If only B. What if C. As if D. Even if
9. The grandfather, much to the surprise of the doctors, won’t want his granddaughter _____ this week.
A. to operate on B. operates C. to be operated on D. operating
10. He is easy to get along with. that, he is a determined boy. Which of the following is wrong?
A. In addition B. Besides C. In addition to D. Apart from
课前导学
1. cut back on 2. open the floor 3. raw material 4. use up
5. be concerned about 6. as/so long as 7. cut down 8. ask around
A D
引导梳理
1. 倒装 头重脚轻
After the banquet came a firework display in the square.
Up went the plane.
In came the chairman
Round the corner walked a tall policeman.
2. 结果 限制性定语从句 先行词chemicals ,定语，chemicals
3. 表语 定语，things 虚拟should+动词原形 虚拟 be punished help
4. 名词性 主语 表语 表语 宾语 原因
5. 状语 宾语补足语 定语 things 定语 主语
6. What if you fall sick?
What if she forgets to bring the book we need?
If I say I won’t go with you,so what?
What’s more
反馈矫正
1. flows 2. production 3. greedy 4. responsibility 5. willing
6.credit 7.belief 8. taxes 9. consult 10. raw
迁移创新
1-5 ABADB 6-10 AABCA
（小周）
篇15：高一必修4Unit3全单元教案(新课标版高一英语必修四教案教学设计)
A Taste of English Humor
单元教学目标
Talk about different types of humor；a taste of English humor
Learn how to express one’s emotions
Learn the –ing form as the Predicative, Attributive and Object Complement
Learn to write humorous stories
目标语言
话题 Different types of humor; a taste of English humor
词汇 1. 四会词汇：
slide, skin, cruel, content, astonish, particular, entertain, entertaining, throughout,
homeless, worn-out, failure, overcome, difficulty, boil, fortunate, snowstorm, chew, bottom, mouthful, direct, star, outstanding, Switzerland, fortune, swing, pancake, mountainous, whisper, vast, sense
2. 词组：
be content with, badly off, pick out, cut off, star in, knock into
功能 情感 ( Emotion )
I enjoy this very much because… It surprises me that…
I laugh at that kind of thing because… I felt happy because…
This is fun because… I’m pleased we were both amused at…
How wonderful / surprising It’s amusing that…
语法 动词的-ing 形式作表语，定语和宾语补足语的用法
Their job is “panning for gold”.
That was the problem facing Charlie Chaplin.
Do you find it funny to see someone sliding on a banana skin?
课时分配
1st Period Reading
2nd Period Speaking
3rd Period Grammar
4th Period Listening
5th Period Writing
6th Period Summary
分课时教案
The First Period
Teaching aims: Enable students to talk about some types of English humor and Chinese humor.
Key points: Help students learn how to understand and enjoy English humors.
Difficult points: Help students know the differences between English and Chinese in humor.
Teaching aids: pictures
Teaching procedure:
Step 1: Lead-in
Show some pictures to students, let them talk about the pictures and then ask them what they think of the pictures, whether they are funny or not.
Questions: 1) Do you know who these comedians are? What makes them funny?
2) Do you know other comedians who are funny in the same way?
3) Have you seen any of these comedians or programmers? What do you think of them?
Step 2: Warming up
Task 1. Brain-storming
Ask students to name some types of humors they know. Write those they are not familiar with on the blackboard, then show some pictures and summarize.
Types of humor Example of English humor Chinese humor
Nonverbal Charlie Chaplin Pantomimes（哑剧）刘全和，刘全利
Mime and farce Mr. Bean Funny plays 陈佩斯，赵本山
Verbal jokes Play on words, usually Cross talk 马季， 姜昆
Funny stories Two lines Jokes
Funny poems Edward Lear Doggerel（打油诗）
Task 2. Talking
Ask students to talk about some funny stories, any English or Chinese humors they know.
Task 3. Reading on P22
The purpose of the reading is to introduce the kind of verbal jokes. They use a “play on words” to be funny. Let students read the three jokes and then match the joke with the explanation. Then check the answer. After that, teacher can show some other jokes on the screen.
Joke 1:
Patient: Doctor, I’ve lost my memory.
Doctor: When did this happen?
Patient: When did what happen?
Joke 2:
Garcia: Thank you doctor. My fever is gone.
Doctor: Don’t thank me. Thank God.
Garcia: Then I will pay the fees to God.
Step 3 Homework
Ask each student to give a joke and present it in class next period.
The Second Period Reading
Teaching aims: Enable students to learn what humor means and what is nonverbal humor.
Key points: Help students divide the text into several parts according to the meaning.
Difficult points: Divide the paragraphs and give the main ideas.
Teaching aids: A recorder and a projector
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Check homework: ask students to present their jokes in class.
Step 2. Pre-reading
Questions: (1) What do you like to laugh at?
(2 ) What does humor mean? Is humor always kind?
Give students some time to discuss. The purpose is to help students know that different people have different taste about humor. It is difficult to say which one is better or which one is worse.
Step 3. Reading
The purpose of this reading is to introduce nonverbal humor. This reading material takes Charlie Chaplin for example. It tells us what nonverbal humor means; what is Charlie Chaplin’s style of acting; how he made a sad situation entertaining and so on.
Task 1. Divide the text into several parts according to the meaning.
Part One: the first and the second paragraph
Part Two: the third and the fourth paragraph
Part Three: the last paragraph
Task 2. Give the main idea of each part
The main idea of part one: It tells us that there are two kinds of humor. One is bad, while the other can inspire people.
The main idea of part two: It tells us something about Charlie Chaplin’s acting style and how Charlie Chaplin made a sad situation entertaining.
The main idea of part three: it gives us a short biography about Charlie Chaplin.
Task 3. Discussion
Let students have a discussion about the text, then answer some questions.
Questions: (1) What is behind fun?
(2 ) Why did people like Little Tramp?
(3 ) Do you think Charlie Chaplin’s eating boiled shoes funny? Why?
Step 4 Language points
1. content (adj.): satisfied, happy, not wanting any more
phrases: content with sth; content to do sth
e.g. (1) She is quite content to stay at home looking after her children.
(2 ) Are you content with your present salary?
Content (n.): that which is contained in sth
e.g. I like the style of her writing but I don’t like the content.
2. inspire sb. ( with sth.) inspire sth. (in sb.): To fill sb. with thoughts, feelings or aims.
e.g. His speech inspired us with hope.
3. badly off: in a poor position, esp. financially
The opposite is “ well off”
e.g. (1) They are too badly off to have a holiday.
(2 ) In fact most people are better off than they were five years ago.
Step 5 Practice
Finish the exercises on page 18, 19, it is a good time to consolidate the whole content of the text and the useful words and expressions from the text. It is easy for most students to finish. So leave students several minutes to finish and check the answers by showing them on the screen.
Step 6 Homework
Preview grammar by finishing Exercises 3, 4 on page 20, all the exercises on page 21.
The Third Period Grammar
Teaching aims: Enable students to learn how to use the –ing form as the attribute, the object complement and the predicative.
Key points: Let students know the structures of the sentences with the –ing form
Difficult points: Help students to tell the –ing form as the predicative and the use of the present continuous tense.
Teaching aids: A computer
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Check homework: the exercises on page 20 and 21.
Step 2. Word formation
Suffix Example
-able valuable lovable comfortable
-ing amusing misleading neighboring
-ful hopeful cheerful useful
-less endless homeless harmless
-ed excited interested moved
-ish Irish childish selfish
-ive active attractive expensive
-ate fortunate affectionate passionate
-ant important pleasant ignorant
-ly friendly orderly costly
There are ten suffixes in the chart. And there are some new words in it. But the purpose of showing this chart is to let students learn more about the adjective suffix.
Step 3. Discovering useful structures
Task 1. Revision
Have a revision about the –ing form used as the subject and object. Give students some sentences to translate:
(1) Talking to him is useless.
(2) Smoking does harm to your health.
(3) Walking is my sole exercise.
(4) Collecting stamps is my hobby.
(5) I suggested bringing the meeting to an end.
(6) He admitted taking the money.
(7) I couldn’t help laughing.
(8) Your coat needs washing.
Task 2. New usage of the –ing form
Ask students to look at the Exercises 4 on page 20. And then wake in pairs to finish the exercises.
Teacher checks the answers and give the explanations.
(1) A cooking pot: A pot that is used for cooking.
(2) A drinking horse: A horse that is drinking water.
(3) The man sitting on the sofa is a friend of my brother’s.
Here the –ing form are used as attribute.
(4) I saw the man sliding on a banner skin yesterday.
(5) Did you notice the man picking up that broken bottle and putting it in his bag?
Hear the –ing form are used as object complement The structure of the sentence with an object complement is:
Subject + Predicate + Object + Object complement
(6) Her job is looking after babies.
(7) What he likes is playing chess after supper.
Here the –ing form are used as predictive. Pay attention to the differences between –ing form used as predicative and present continuous tense.
(1) Her hobby is painting.
(2) Her favorite sport is skiing.
(3) This was very disappointing.
(4) The test results are very discouraging.
(5) She was very pleasing in her appearance.
(6) His concern for his mother is very touching.
(7) The photograph is missing.
(8) The article was misleading, and the newspaper has apologized.
In the first two sentences, the –ing form is used to show the character of the subject. In the next four sentences the words of the –ing form are all about the feelings. In the last two sentences, the words of the –ing form show some states and qualities.
(9) It is snowing hard.
(10) She is teaching in a night school.
In these two sentences, the –ing form are used as the predicate in the present continuous tense.
Step 4. Using Structures
Turn to page 56. Look at the Using Structure. There are two exercises in this part. Exercise 1 is to let students correct some errors in the sentences. This is not an easy job for most students, because it needs other knowledge, besides what the students learned today. So better leave them more time to do this exercise. For exercise 2, let students finish it in a short time. With the help of the pictures, students can easily understand the meaning and correctly use the –ing form to finish the blanks. Teacher can check the answers in class.
Step 4. Homework
Finish all exercises on page 56.
The Fourth Period Listening
Teaching aims: Enable students to understand the humor in the listening material.
Key points: Train the students to get the key wards by reading the questions before listening.
Difficult points: Get the main idea from the listening materials while listening.
Teaching aids: A recorder
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Check homework: (1) Ask a couple of students to tell their jokes in class.
(2 ) Ask some students to come to the blackboard to write their translation. After they have finished, teacher correct some errors with the whole class.
Step 2. Listening ( page 23 )
This is a funny story. Mary made some plum jam and left some in the pan. Five days later, her husband came home and poured the jam into the chicken. Later Mary came home and found all of her chickens were behaving strangely. What had happened? Give students two chances to listen to the story. First, go through Exercise1 and 2 to know what are the things they will do while listening. After that teacher plays the tape for them to finish Exercise 1. The second listening is to check the answers. For Exercise 2, teacher should leave some time for students to discuss the question.
Questions: (1) Did you find this story funny? Give the reason.
(2 ) What do you think of John’s behavior?
Step 2. Listening ( page 55 )
This is a story about a thief and a man. The situation is very interesting. Before listening, ask students what they would do if they find a thief in their home one day; whether they will be afraid of the thief and so on.
There are three steps for this listening. At first let students read the questions to make sure that they know what they should do in this listening. Next, play the tape for the first time to let students finish Exercise 1. Then play the tape again and let the students finish the questions in Exercise 2. After that, let the students check their answers with each other. At last, listen to the tape again, teacher can make a pause where there is an question to the question, in this way students can check all the answers.
Step 3. Listening ( page 58 )
There are four exercises in this listening. The first one requests students to get the general idea of the material. The second one is to ask the students to know some details of the material. The third one is a question that asks the students to speculate the teacher’s feeling. And the last one is a good exercise, it gives the students another chance to practice their oral English.
Step 4. Homework
Collect as many funny stories as possible, do some preparations for the writing in the next period.
The Fifth Period Writing
Teaching aims: Help the students learn how to write funny stories using the target language and according to the writing steps.
Key points: Teach students to write according to the writing of the writing steps.
Difficult points: Help students make up a dialogue, using the target language.
Teaching aid: A projector
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Check homework: Ask several students to read their funny stories in class.
Step 2. Writing ( page 23 )
Give students some instructions on writing a funny story.
1) Writing down your story in a logical order.
2) For each of your story try to find the most interesting words you can to describe how you felt or what was happing.
3) Then write out your story using these interesting words.
4) Read through your story.
5) Then show it to your partner. Let him/ her suggest some new and exciting words.
6) Write out the story and put it into a class collection of stories.
Give students enough time to finish the task and give them enough help in the writing. Tell them to give the outline first, then finish the story.
Step 3. Talking
Task 1. Show students some pictures. Ask them to describe the pictures and explain what is happening, whether it is funny or not.
Task 2. Imagine you want to play a trick on someone, maybe an April Fool’s trick. Work with partners, think up a funny thing and share it with the class.
Step 4. Speaking and writing task
This is a chance for students to learn limericks. It has only five lines. Three of them are longer than the other two. The longer lines all rhyme with each other and the shorter ones rhyme with each other. When introducing the poems, teacher read them first, and let the students enjoy the beauty of the rhyme. And at the same time point out that there must be two sets of rhyming words in the same poem, so the students can grasp the main feature of the poem.
After reading, ask students to tell the rhyme of the first and the second poem. Let students read the poems several times and feel it. Find more limericks for students to enjoy.
Give students some instructions on how to write a poem, let them think of rhyming words before writing. They need two sets of rhyming words.
Step 5. Homework
1) Finish Exercise 5 on Page 20.
2) Make a summary about what has been learnt in this unit.
The Six Period Summary
Teaching aims: 1) Learn to express the sentences that are connected with the positive and negative view of the same thing. 2) Make a summary about what has been learnt in this unit.
Key points: Sum up what we have learnt in this unit.
Difficult points: Sum up what we have learnt in this unit.
Teaching aids: A projector
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Check homework: Ask students to present their dialogue in class.
Step 2. Reading
This reading task gives us another joke. The title is “An April fool’s joke: The Noodle Harvest”. Ask students to read the sentence : “A fool sees not the same tree that a wise man sees.” After reading, explain the meaning of the sentence. (The meaning is that the thing is the same, but the way to treat it is different between a fool and a wise man.)
Give students some time to read the passage, then answer some questions and retell the whole story.
Questions: 1) What do children usually do on April Fool’s Day?
2) Why did people believe the programme Panorama?
3) Do you think the advice that the BBC gave people who asked how to grow noodle trees was serious? Give a reason..
4) What would you do to find out whether a story like this was true?
Step 3. Project
Ask students to make their own collection of jokes, funny poems or short stories. They can be the ones that they enjoy in the books that they have read. Make sure they add either a joke, a funny poem or a funny short story of their own. Copy them into a book and display it in the class so that all your classmates can enjoy them.
Step 4. Summing up
This is a summary about what they have learned in the unit. Leave students some time to finish the frame. Then teacher give students a dictation about the useful words and expressions.
功能句式：
1. I enjoy this very much because….
2. I laugh at that kind of thing because…
3. This is fun because….
4. How wonderful / surprising！
5. It surprises me that…
6. I’m pleased we were both amused at…
7. I felt happy because…
8. It’s amusing that…
语法：
1. Word formation
2. The –ing form of the verb used as predicative, attribute and object complement.
重点句子：
1. Do you find it funny to see someone sliding on a banana skin, bumping into someone else round a Conner, or filling down a hole in the end.
2. Perhaps it makes us feel more content with our life…
3. He became famous for using a particular form of acting, including mime and farce.
4. But he was lived by all who watched the film for his determination in overcoming difficulties and being kind even when people were unkind to him.
5. Imagine you are hungry and all there is to eat is boiled shoe.
6. He solved it by using nonverbal humor.
7. Their job is “panning for gold”.
8. This was the problem facing Charlie Chaplin in one of his most famous films.
Translate the following sentences into Chinese and pay attention to the use of the –ing form.
1. The two comedians performing on the stage are from Liaoning Province.
2. Who is the girl walking by the river.
3. The children playing the violin will give a performance next week.
4. The man with sunglass standing near the car is a cross talk artist.
5. The old lady talking to the children is a famous musician.
6. I saw a group of policemen coming out of a green jeep and running to the building.
7. I saw a dog carrying a piece of meat entering your garden.
8. I heard her singing a beautiful song at the party last night.
9. I got frightened when I saw a man playing with a snake in the park.
10. There were some boys shouting and crying under my window, so I could not fall asleep.
Step 5. Check yourself
1. Do you find it difficult to understand English humor? Why?
2. What role do you thing humor plays in your life?
3. What language points have you learned in this unit?
4. How well have you done in the exercises on the –ing form?
5. Did you have any problems in understanding this unit? How did you solve them?
Step 6. Homework
Do some preparations for unit 4.
篇16：新课标模块2 unit1 revision(新课标版高一英语必修二教案教学设计)
Unit 1 ［背诵要点］
1．A cultural relic is something that has survived for a long time, often a part of something old that has remained when the rest of it has been destroyed.
2. It is your job to look into any reports of cultural relics that have been found in China.
3. It is a rare Ming Dynasty vase.
4. The man who has it insists that it belongs to his family.
5. It feels as hard as stone, it easily melts when heated. Once it is heated, the amber can be made into any shape.
6. The design for the room was of the fancy style popular in those days.
7. It took a team of the country’s best artists ten years to make it (It takes sb st to do sth).
8. In return ,the Czar gave the King his best soldiers.
9. About four meter long, the room served as a small reception hall for important visitors.
10. She had the Amber Room moved to the palace where she spent her summers. (have sth done)
11. The room was completed the way she wanted it.
12. There was a time when the two countries were at war.
13. There is no doubt that the boxes were put on a train.
14. What happened to the Amber Room remains a mystery.
15. Following old photos, the new room has been made to look much like the old one.
16. The old man saw some Germans taking apart the Amber Room and moving it away.
17. In a trial, you must decide which eyewitnesses to believe and which not to believe.
18. The judge does not consider how each eyewitness looks or where that person lives or works.
19. The judge cares only whether the eyewitness has given useful information, which must be facts, rather than opinions.
20. For example, it can be proved that China has more people than any other country in the world.
21. I think highly of those who are searching for the Amber Room.
22. I don’t agree that they should return the treasure to Russia. Nor do I think they should give it to any government.
23. Besides, my father told me that any person who finds something can keep it.
练习
一 翻译下列单词或短语
1 调查 11 认为,考虑
2 作为报答 12 拆开
3 制成… 13 移走
4 属于 14 而不是
5 保持不变 15 在…流行
6 活着,继续存在 16 除了…之外还有
7 毫无疑问 17 寻找
8 高度评价 18 处于交战状态
9 证明 19 木制的
10问题的答案 20 点亮；点燃
二 用上面的词或短语填空
1. The new Harry Potter novel __________________ middle school students throughout the world.
2. The hungry boy rushed into the house _______________something to eat.
3. I will___________ the matter and then tell you the result.
4. China is a country __________________the developing country.
5. The door __________open all night long.
6. He didn’t know to do something ____________for her help.
7. People __________Lincoln as one of the greatest presidents in America.
8. His word________ to be right later.
9．The (木制家具) in the sitting room were borrowed from neighbors.
10．He （light）a candle and the (light) candle (light) the whole room.
三 完成句子
1 大火过后什么也没留下.
After the fire________________.
2 他们的年龄都一样.
They are________________________.
3 我在考虑再次去那里.
I _______________________________there again.
4 小孩子总喜欢把玩具拆散.
The children always____________________.
5 你会高度评价那些总帮助别人的人吗?
______________________those who always help others?
6 一旦被加热,琥珀可以制成各种形状.
___________________, the amber can ____________any shape.
7 当时中日双方正在打仗,因此交通变得极其困难.
At that time, _________________________-so traveling was extremely difficult.
8 从那以后琥珀屋的最终所归便成了一个谜.
After that, what really happened to the Amber Room______________.
9 他昨天买了一套家具.
He bought __________________yesterday.
10请把座位上的袋子拿开以便我能坐下.
Please ________________so that I can sit down.
四 翻译句子
1只有用这种方法你才能提高你的英语水平.(倒装语序)
2 我真的不想去,但他硬要我去. (insist)
3 他不可能把他的书带回家了,因为他所有的书都放在桌上. (情态动词+have done)
4 我拿不准这礼物是谁的? (belong to)
5 她给了我们食物和衣服,没要求任何回报. (in return)
6 毫无疑问,他将为他所做的受到惩罚. (doubt)
7 这是两国交战时期. (at war)
8 虽然他自己并没有觉得做了什么突出的事情,他的同事们却对他交口称赞.
9 父母进来时他假装睡着了. (pretend)
10大量的证据证实他是清白的. (prove)
五．完型填空：每小题1.5分，共22.5分
Dear Classmates,
As young people, we don’t always want to think about the past. 1 we often hear our grandfathers and grandmothers talk about cultural relics. They say we 2 protect some of these relics because they are important to our culture. 3 also say that these relics are important to us because they help us remember the 4 of our ancestors and respect what they have done. I’m sure you will 5 . After all, someday we will be 6 ourselves and will want our own children to protect them. So I have a plan for 7 the painting in the old temple, which is a fine cultural relic 8 in our hometown. It should be protected because it was painted by a 9 artist of the early Qing Dynasty. My plan is to get students to take a 10 to see it on a Saturday next month and then 11 some important people to join us. 12 , we can also write an 13 about it for the town newspaper. Later, when others begin to 14 their help, perhaps we can 15 enough money to help the museum buy it. If you like my plan, please give me a note to your teacher. Thank you.
Yours.
1. A. However B. Yet C. Therefore D. And
2. A. can B. must C. will D. need
3. A. Some B. We C. They D. Others
4. A. days B. dreams C. lives D. styles
5. A. refuse B. allow C. doubt D. agree
6. A. greater B. stronger C. richer D. older
7. A. surviving B. remaining C. saving D. removing
8. A. there B. here C. where D. anywhere
9. A. famous B. rare C. gifted D. skillful
10. A. trip B. look C. bus D. rest
11. A. take B. order C. beg D. ask
12. A. In a word B. Besides C. First of all D. By the way
13. A. poem B. passage C. article D. diary
14. A. prove B. offer C. supply D. provide
15. A. make B. earn C. raise D. give
改错
1. What the king said is remained a mystery.
2. This strange vegetable belongs potato family.
3. There is some doubt that he will come tomorrow.
4. The man insisted that he not steal the money and that he should not say sorry.
答案：
look into make into in return belong to remain survive have no doubt think highly of prove the answer to the question consider
take apart remove rather than be popular among/ with besides in search of
be at war wooden light
is popular with/ among ; in search of ; look into; belonging to; remained; consider; proved; wooden furniture; lit/lighted, lighted, lit/lighted
1 nothing remained
2 of the same age
3. am considering going
4 like taking the toys apart
5. Do you think highly of
6 Once (it is) heated; be made into
7. China and Japan were at war
8. remains a mystery
9. a set of furniture;
10. remove your bag from the seat
1. Only in this way can you improve your English.
2 I didn’t really want to go but he insisted.
3. He can’t have taken his books home for all of them are lying on the table.
4. I am not quite sure who/ whom the gift belongs to.
5. She gave us food and clothes and asked for nothing in return.
6. There’s no doubt that he will be punished for what he has done.
7. This was a time when the countries were at war.
8. His colleagues thought highly of him though he himself didn’t think he had done anything special.
9. He pretended to be asleep when his parents came in.
10. A great deal of evidence proved him innocent.
五．完型填空 1-5. BBCCD 6-10. DCBAA 11-15. DBCBC
篇17：高一必修1 Unit 3 Travel journal教学设计(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Unit 3 Travel journal
Designed by Xu Jianying, Ying Huihong, Zhao Lili Wu Xianfen, Jiang Jinling
I．Teaching aims and demands:
1.Skill goals:
Describe a journey.
Revise means of transportation.
The Present Progressive Tense expresses futurity.
Keep a travel journal to show personal impressions.
2.Function sentence patterns---Good wishes and farewells
Have a nice/ good time. Have a nice/good time.
Tare care. Good luck on your journey.
Say “ hello” to … Write to me.
Give my love / best wishes to … Have fun.
3.Vocabulary:
journal, fare, transport, finally, cycle, persuade, stubborn, insist, proper(ly), determine(d), altitude, valley, attitude, shorts, camp, record, topic, familiar, brave, give in, change one’s mind.
detail, atlas, glacier, rapids, waterfall, plain, delta, canyon, afterthought.
Vientiane, Laos, Phnom Penh, Cambodia, Ho Chi Minh, Vietnam, Mekong, Tibetan.
4.Grammar:
The Present Continuous Tense to express future actions.
II.The analysis of the teaching material:
1. Warming-up and listening: Let students know that travel is very common in modern society. Ask them to discuss the fares to get to one place for different kinds of transport. Do some listening practice
2. Pre-reading and reading: The word has many great rivers. One of them is the Mekong. Introduce a travel journal---Journey down the Mekong to students.
3.Learning about language: In this part, students will discover useful words and expressions and also learn useful structures---- the Present Continuous Tense to express future actions
5.Using language: Present how to write a travel journal and then practise writing
III.Teaching arrangment
1st Period warming-up and listening
2nd Period Reading
3rd Period learn about language
4th Period Using language
The First Period warming-up and listening
Teaching aims
1. To talk about things related to travel, e.g. the place the fares and transport, etc.
2. To improve the Ss’ listening ability.
Teaching important points
1. To talk about travel.
2. To tell the Ss how to catch the key points when they do listening.
Emotion goals:
There are so many beautiful places in China and the whole world. We should love our country, love the whole world and love nature.
Teaching aids
a tape recorder, a projector and a computer
Step 1. A song (歌词见后面)
Step 2 Warming up
Show the photos of some beautiful places on the PowerPoint. （The Great Wall; Yuanming Yuan ; Budala Palace; Venice; The Liberty Statue in New York,America; Fujiyama.）Ask students whether they know where they are.
Then T ask: Do you like traveling? Ss: Yes
T: Why do you like traveling? (超级链接)：Enjoy beautiful scenery; Increase our knowledge; Make friends; Be good to health… Ss may have a lot of different ideas. Give them time to talk freely.
T ask: How will you prepare for traveling? (including the time, the place, the means, the cost, the things you’ll take along, … of traveling) (超级链接) :
1. time (超级链接): the Spring Festival; National Day; May Day; weekend;
summer( winter) vacation…
2.destination(超级链接): Enjoy some beautiful pictures of famous places with the whole class: Huangshan黄山; Jiuzhaigou九寨沟; Guilin桂林; Stone Forest
(石林); Jiuquxi(九曲溪; Yunufeng,wuyi(武夷玉女峰); Sanqing Mountain三清山;
Hangzhou; Longmen Caves (龙门石窟); Tian’anmen Square(天安门广场); Terracotta,Xi’an(西安兵马俑); Summer Palace(颐和园); London Bridge;
The Opera House悉尼歌剧院; Eiffel Tower艾菲尔铁塔.
3.What to do(超级链接): Rock climbing; rafting; bengee; skiing; hiking
Allow the Ss to talk more about it.
4.travel cost: talk with the Ss quickly.
5.things to take(超级链接): ID cards(身份证) passports; money (cash); a book of maps; 等。
6.means of transportation(超级链接): on foot; by bike; by bus; by car; by plane/by air; by boat/by ship/by sea
7. background information(超级链接): history; customs; culture; language; religion; politics; weather; …
8. Points for attention(超级链接): Don’t throw away waste; Don’t park your bike or car in the wrong parking lot; Don’t make a fire freely; Don’t feed animal; Protect animals and plants; Do as the guide tells you do; ….
Step 3 Speaking
T: Now, imagine that you live in Qinghai Province. You plan to spend a holiday with a friend somewhere in Southeast Asia. Choose three places to visit and find out the one –way fare to get there for different kinds of transport. Then, make up a dialogue In pairs, discuss the fares and decide where to go.
Before they do that task, show a map of Southeast Asia with detailed position of
Laos; Vietnam; Ho Chi Minh City; Phnom Penh; Thailand; Cambodia; Singapore; Malaysia.
Then show some pictures of the sceneries in these countries. Then give the Ss several minutes to prepare for the dialogue and then call some of them to act their dialogues out.
Step 4 Listening
1.Listen to Part 3 CHATTING WITH A GIRL and tick the words .
2. Listen again to the tape and fill in the chart
3.Listen to Part 4 of JOURNAL DOWN THE MEKONG and tick the words you hear on the tape.
4.Listen to this material again and answer the questions.
(1)Who is telling the story? Wang Kun
(2)When did Wang Wei meet her cousins? In October in Dali
(3)Why didn’t they begin the journey in Tibet with Wang Wei and Wang Kun?
The story doesn’t say
(4)Find a word that describe how the person telling the story feels about travelling in Laos. Afraid,alone,excited,glad…
5.Listen to Part 5. Wang Kun is describing a few of the things they saw during their tour. Pick out the correct in formation and then tell about their experience in Laos.
(1) In the village the cyclists saw ____B___.
A. electric lights B. candle lights C. kerosene lights
(2)After lunch they went to Vientiane ,the capital city of Laos by B.
A. bike B. bus C. truck
(3)They greeted an old man by ____A____.
A. putting their hands together B. moving their heads C. waving their arms.
(4) In Vientiane, they saw _____C_____
A. trucks, buses and bicycles B. cars, motorbikes and buses
C. trucks, buses, jeeps and motorbikes
(5) The Mekong River is very rich in ____C__.
A. gold B. pears C. fish
Step 5 Homework
Make up a dialogue .
P57. Using structures
P59. Reading task
The Second Period Reading
Teaching goals
1. Learn something about the Mekong River through reading.
2. Students can use what they have learned to describe a trip.
3. Students should realize if they want to be successful, what personalities they should have.
Teaching important and difficult points:
1. Understand the text well.
2. Try to master the useful new words & expressions in this period.
Teaching aids: a computer & a projector
Teaching procedures
Step Ⅰ Warming Up
T: Do you like travelling?
Present some pictures of beautiful places to arouse their interest of travelling. Meanwhile, the teacher can also ask some more questions to make the students say something about their journey , such as their plans of trips, the difficulties they met in their journey and so on.
Step Ⅱ Lead In
T: Q1: Have you visited any river? Q2: How many great rivers do you know?
Q3 : If you could travel down only one of them, which one would you choose? Why?
Ask the students the locations of some famous rivers in the world .(Mekong, Rhein, Seine, Nile, Thames, Congo, Amazon, Mississippi, Volg)
Step Ⅲ Pre-reading
T: Have you visited the Mekong River? If no, let’s learn something about it.
1. Show a picture of the Mekong River and the brief introduction of it. Ask them:
Can you list the countries that the Mekong River flows through?
3. Enjoy the beautiful sights along the Mekong River to arouse their interest of it.
Step IV Reading
In this step, get the students to read the text and finish some tasks.
Task1: Scan the text quickly, then answer some questions
Q1. Who are Wang kun and Wang Wei?
Q2.What are their dreams?
Q3.Who are Dao Wei and Yu Hang?
Q4. Is it a difficult journey to cycle along the Mekong? Why?
Q5.What can you see when you travel along the Mekong River?
Task2: Listen to the tape and pay attention to the pronunciation, then do the T or F exercise.
1.Wang kun is a high school student.
2.Both Dao Wei and Yu Hang are Dai and they grew up in eastern Yunnan province
3.The source of Mekong is in Qinghai province .
4.Finally Wang Kun agreed with his sister to cycle with her.
5.They found few atlas and books about Mekong River in library. 6. Mekong river begins at glacier on a Tibet mountain. the water there is clear but not cold.
7. Only a small part of the river is in China.
8.As it enters Southeast Asia, it moves slowly.
Task3: Careful reading
Read the text again and try to complete a form.
their dream
Their journey
Their preparation
Task4: Consolidation
Fill in the blanks
Mekong River begins ___ a glacier on a Tibetan mountain. At first ,The river is small and the water begins to move_______. It becomes ______as it passes ______ deep valleys. Traveling ______western Yunnan Province. Sometimes The River ______ wide Valley and becomes a_________. We were both surprised to learn that half of the river is in China . After it leaves china and the high altitudes, the Mekong becomes _____ , brown and warm. As it enters Southeast Asia, it travels slowly _________hills and low valleys, and the _____ where rice grows. at last the river’s delta enters the South China Sea.
Step V Post-reading
Task1: Make comparison
An attitude is what a person thinks about something. Make lists of Wang Wei’s and Wang Kun’s similar and different attitudes about the trip.
Task2: Debate
Which character do you like,Wang Kun or Wang wei? Why?
Task3: Understand two mottos
Life is just a series of trying to make up your mind.
Success belongs to the persevering
Step VI Homework
1． Read the text again.
2． Write a passage about their journey.
The Third Period Learning about language
Teaching goals
1.To revise the useful words and expressions.
2. To learn useful structures--- the Present Continuous Tense to express future actions.
Teaching important points
the Present Continuous Tense to express future actions.
Teaching difficult points
How to use the Present Continuous Tense to express a plan or something to be done according to plan..
Teaching aids
a projector and a computer
Step 1:Greeting ： A song.
Step 2:Practice
一、Use the reading passage to find the correct word or expression for each of the following sentences.
1.He is so stubborn that no one can ____________ him to do anything.
2.A ___________ person always tries to finish the job, no matter how hard it is.
3._______ she has made up her mind, nothing will ___________________.
4.Is it_______ for us to take off our hats in church?
5.He ________ that we find the source of the trouble as soon as possible. Everyone agreed.
6.Do you remember every _____ of the story you have just read.
7.I wanted to pay the train ____ , but my friend insisted. _______I gave in.
8.She persuaded all of us to _______ to work instead of taking the bus。
Answer: 1. persuade 2. determined 3. Once; change her mind
4. proper 5. insisted 6. detail 7 fare; Finally 8. cycle
二、Match the words and the meanings
valley a high place from which a river suddenly goes down.
plain a fast-moving part of a river.
waterfall a long, low, wide place between hills.
delta the long place where a river enters the sea
rapids a large body of ice moving slowly down a high valley
canyon a large flat place
glacier a deep, very wide valley, usually with a river
超级链接: some pictures of all these words to help Ss understand the meaning of the words more clearly.
三、Complete this passage with some of the above words.
I really enjoyed my school field trip in geography. We saw so many beautiful things: a _________ that flowed like a river of ice through a _______ that cut the mountains into two parts. We also discovered a river which fell off the mountains and become a wonderful __________this was even more exciting to see than the _______ where the water seemed to boil. Later we followed the river to a quieter ______ and finally into a ______ and the sea.
Answer: glacier valley waterfall rapids canyon delta
STEP 3 : Grammar
Enjoy a song to present the Present Continuous Tense:
I'm babysitting on Thursday
Would you like to go out on Monday?
No, sorry, I can’t
Why not?
I’m babysitting on Monday.
Would you like to go out on Tuesday?
No, sorry, I can’t.
Why not?
I’m doing my laundry on Tuesday.
Would you like to go out on Wednesday?
No, sorry, I can’t.
Why not?
I’m working overtime on Wednesday.
Would you like to go out on Thursday?
No, sorry, I can’t.
Why not?
I’m working out on Thursday.
Would you like to go out on Friday?
No, sorry, I can’t.
Why not?
I’m visiting relatives on Friday.
Would you like to go out on the weekend?
Well… maybe!
Ask the Ss to answer: What is she doing on Monday/Tuesday…?
The Present Continuous Tense for future use
The present continuous tense can be used to express a plan or an arrangement.
现在进行时可用来表示一个在最近按计划或打算要进行的动作；通常带一个表将来的时间状语, 但有明确的上下文时无须指出时间。
能用进行时表将来的动词：
go, come, leave, start, arrive, give, return, sleep ,stay, play, do, take, get, see off, travel, fly, drive, walk, reach, meet…
Step4: Practice
1. Look at the following dialogue and underline the verbs in this tense.
A: Are you working this evening?
B: No. We’re having an English party, don’t you know?
A: Yes, I do. And we’re giving some performance at the party. What are you going to do?
B: I’m singing song with my classmates.
2. In the following dialogue, a newspaper reporter is interviewing Wang Wei about her plans for the trip along the Mekong River. However, they are not sure about some of the verb tenses. Please help them complete their conversation.
R: Miss Wang. I hear that you _____________ along the Mekong
River. That’s really exciting. Have you got everything ready?
W: Almost.
R:When are you _________ ?
W:Next Monday.
R: How far are you _______ each day?
W:It’s hard to say. If the weather is fine, I think we’ll be able to ride 75km a day.
R:Where are __________ at night?
W: Usually in our tent, but sometimes in a small hotel in town.
R: Do you think you are ______ back here soon?
W:Oh, we __________ back to this place.
We __________ home. That’ll be a month later.
R:Thank you for your time, Miss Wang. Good luck on your journey!
W:Thank you!
Answer: are going to cycle ; leaving; cycling; you staying; coming; aren’t coming; are returning
3. Multiple choice:
1.--I’m going to the states.
-- How long ____ you _______ in the States?
A. are ; stayed B. are ; staying C. have ; stayed D. did ; stay
2.--Will you tell us something about the weather there?
--I ________ to that.
A. go B. come C. am going D. am coming
3.-When are you leaving?
--The plane ________ at 11:05.
A. takes off B. took off C. will take off D. taking off
4.-I believe if we _________ abroad, most probably we will go by CAAC.
A. have been B. are going C. had been D. were going
5.-I’m going to Shanghai for a few weeks.
--_______________.
A. Good-bye B. So long C. Have a good time. D.I like it
6. A new play _____ at the theatre this week. Would you like to see it?
A. has been put on B. has put on C. is being put on D. will put on
7.-Where are you going for your holidays?
-_________.
A. What a good idea B. I’m going to Spain on business
C. I won’t have to go D. I haven’t made up my mind yet
8.-I’ll go camping this weekend.
--_____________.
A. Don’t give up now B. No, I’m too busyC. Have a good time D. Can you fish?
9.I’ve won a holiday for two to Florida. I ____ my mum.
A. am taking B. have taken C. take D. will have taken
Answer: 1.B 2.C 3.A 4. B 5. C 6. C 7. B 8. C 9. A
Step5: DIALOGUE
1. First show an example: Where you going on holiday?
A: Yanzi, where you going on holiday? B: I’ m going to Laos.
A: When are you leaving? B: Next Sunday.
A: How are you going to Laos? B: I’m taking a plane.
A: How long are you staying there? B: About two weeks.
A: Great. Have a good trip. B: Thanks.
Farewells:
Have a good trip/ journey; Have a good day/ time;
Enjoy yourself; Best wishes; Have fun; Good luck; Take care!
2. A game:
Divide the class into two groups with one leader. Each group will need one coin and a counter.
Procedure: 1. Show the Ss the board game.
2. Demonstrate the task: toss a coin and explain that one side of the coin means move two spaces, the other means move one space. Move your counter onto a square and speak for thirty seconds on the subjects of the square.
Encourage questions.
Step6:HOMEWORK
1.Do exercises on Page 56, 57
2.Review The Present Continuous Tense ,then do exercises on Page57,58
Period 4 Using Language
Teaching goals:
1). To read the passage A NIGHT IN THE MOUNTAINS
2). To use the language by reading, listening, speaking and writing. Teaching important and difficult points:
1).Improve the students’ writing ability.
2).Enable the students to understand the passage better.
Step 1 Lead-in
1. Enjoy the music “青藏高原”
2. Appreciate the beauty of Tibet.
3. Ask students several questions about the pictures, e.g.
What do you think of these pictures?
What’s the weather like there?
Do you want to go there? etc.
4. Talking about Tibet.
Have you ever been to Tibet? Do you want to travel in Tibet? Can you tell me something about Tibet?
Tibet lies on the Qinghai-Tibet Plateau of the southwest border of China. The average height of the whole region is more than 4,000 meters above sea level, for which Tibet is known as “Roof of the World”. The highest peak of Tibet, also the highest in Himalayas and in the whole world, is Everest Peak, which is as high as 8,846.27 meters above sea level.
Although a part of China, Tibet has a unique culture of all its own. It is mainly inhabited by Tibetans, a minority nationality of old and mysterious people. Tourist attractions include the Potala Palace in Lhasa, Jokhang Temple, and a number of Buddhist sacred places.
Tibet (Xi Zang in Chinese) is to the south of Xin Jiang Uygur Autonomous Region and Qing Hai Province, to the west of Sichuan, to the northwest of Yunnan and to the north of India and Nepal. Its population of 2.3 million people come from a variety of ethnic groups including Tibetan, Han, Monba and Lhota. Its capital city is Lhasa. Northwest Tibet, mainly Qing Hai plateau, is home to a variety of unusual and unique animals. Across the northern expanse of Tibet, you can see vast grasslands where horses, yak and sheep roam freely. The world's lowest valley, the Grand Yarlun-tzanpo River Valley lies in east Tibet. It is freezing cold in most time of the year. Most tourists come to visit Tibet only in the warmest seasons, June, July, August and early September.
Step 2 Reading
We know Wang Wei and Wang Kun have traveled down the Mekong. Today they have reached the Tibetan Mountains. They will stay there for a night. Now let’s look at the passage “A night in the mountains” on page 22. Read it quickly to find the main idea. Show some questions.
1.How does Wang Kun feel about the trip now?
2.What do you think has changed his attitude?
3.Is it natural for Wang Kun not to feel lonely?
4.Would you feel the same way in this situation? Why or Why not?
Step 3 Listen and mark
Let the students listen to the recorder and mark the rising and falling tone of each sense group and sentence. Then practice reading aloud. Pay attention to pronunciation and intonation.
Step 4 Dialogue
Suppose Wang Wei and Wang Kun leave their camp the next morning and go on with the journey. Make a short dialogue between them.
Sample dialogue :
--Oh , up so early?
--Early? It’s nearly 9 o’clock.
--Oops! (Look at his watch). I guess you’re right.
--Why were you so tired?
--Well, I stayed up late last night to watch the stars.
--That’s nice. They must be pretty.
--Yes, they are.
Then ask students to make up their own dialogues. They may discuss and practice in pairs.
Step 5 Guided writing
1.reading
In this unit, we have read the first two parts of a travel journal and have listened to the third part of the travel journal. What is the difference between a journal and a diary? Let’s read the passage on page 23 and find out the difference between the two.
A diary
A travel journal
2 Writing a letter
Now let’s do a writing practice. Imagine that you are a friend of Wang Wei. Write a short letter to her and ask her to describe: how she feels, what she is doing, and some place you want to know about. Then wish her well on her journey by using at least two of these expressions:
Have a nice/good time. Have a nice/good trip. Take care.
Good luck on your journey. Say “Hello” to …. Write to me.
Give my best/love wishes to …. Have fun.
Tell the students that they can refer to the following steps.
In pairs. Choose the details from the journey that are most interesting. Think of what else you would like to know about the journey. Write these ideas down as questions.
Now choose two or three of the best questions for your letter. Each question should have another sentence explaining why you want to know this information.
Put them in an order that makes sense.
Begin your letter as shown in the textbook and add your questions for Wang Wei.
Finish your letter as shown in the textbook.
A sample writing:
Hi, brave little Wei,
How I worry about you and Wang Kun! Do you have a good time now? I hope so. What are you doing now? Are you still in Laos? Can you tell me something about people’s life there? When are you leaving for Cambodia? When you get there, tell me about the Buddhist temples there. Please send some photos with your next letter! Well, Have a good trip and don’t forget to write to me! Give my best wishes to Wang Kun. Good luck on your journey.
Take care!
Yours,
Wang Lin
Step 6 Homework
1. Finish writing the letter
2. Review the whole unit
3. Read the passage in workbook( page 59) “The end of our journey ”.
Language points
1. one-way fare / single-way fare (单程票价), round-way fare (往返/双程票价)
2. different kinds of transport (Br.E) / transportation(Am.E)
3. journey down the Mekong 湄公河之旅
有 “沿着”之意,相当于 “along”,
1) 由北向南,由西向东用down, 反之用up;
2) 由城镇向农村时用down, 反之用up;
3) 依门牌号码,由大数字向小数字行进时,应用down ,反之用up;
4) 由上而下,如:沿着山坡而下,沿着江河顺流而下,从楼上到楼下由住宅到街上，应用down,
反之用up
Para.1: 4. dream of / about doing 梦想，梦见（后接名词，代词，动名词）
e.g. What a small world! I wouldn’t dream of meeting you here.
The young soldier sometimes dreams of his hometown.
dream n. have/dream a dream, realize a dream
5. take a bike trip *
6. get a chance to do *
7. finally, adv. 最后，终于final adj. 最后的，n （常用复数）决赛，期末考试
e.g. We waited and waited, and the train finally arrived.
What is the final score of the table tennis single for men?
How are you prepared for your finals?
8. cycle along *
9. go for bike rides *
10. in the countryside *
11. persuade sb (not) to do, 说服某人（不）做…
persuade sb that + clause 使某人相信
Then she persuaded me to buy one.=Then she succeeded in asking me to buy one.
e.g. The salesman persuaded us to buy his product.
He tried to persuade me that he was honest.
persuade sb to do sth 指成功地说服,
“说而不服, 或说而无果”应用 advise sb to do sth / try to persuade sb to do
12. at the college/ university *
13. get / make sb interested in = interest sb, show interest in sth/ sb
get+ n./pron.+adj.=make + n./pron.+adj.
e.g. They didn’t get home after school as usual, which got/ made mother worried.
Para.2: 14. Although she didn’t know the best way of… although “虽然,但是”,引导让步状语从句,不与but连用
though一般可与although互用，引导的让步状语从句有时用倒装语序.作副词时, “然而,可是”,通常放于句尾,并用逗号与句子隔开
e.g. Young though he is, he is very rich.
He said he would come; he didn’t, though.
15. a way of doing/ to do *
e.g. She didn’t know the best way of getting to places.= She didn’t know the best way to get to places.
16. insist (若insist后面宾语从句的主语与主句的主语不一致,谓语由加动词原形构成,
其中should可省略)
insist that sb (should)do 坚持认为，坚持说
insist on/upon sth/ doing 坚持做，坚决做
e.g. We insisted that father (should) give up smoking.
She insisted on/upon going to Beijing by air.
17. care about, care for, care to do
care about关心,忧虑 care for喜欢,照顾 care to do愿意/同意做某事
e.g. I don’t care (about) what happens to him.
Would you care for a drink?
Would you care to go for a walk?
18. give sb a determined look, determined坚定的,坚决的
e.g. They were determined to drive the enemy away from their country.=They determined to drive…
determine to do= make up one’s mind to do, decide to do
19. change one’s mind, mind此处解“意见，想法”，[C]
make up one’s mind 下定决心,拿好主意
e.g. Once he has made up his mind, nothing can be done to change his mind.
20. at a altitude of…* 在海拔…米处 at a altitude of 10,000 feet
21. be excited about *
22. breathe the air, take a breath
23. experience [U] “经验，感受” have experience in/at doing
[C]“经历，体验”
e.g. I’d prefer a lady with rich experience in/ at looking after babies.
His experiences in Africa are interesting.
24. give in 屈服，投降，让步 give in to sb 向某人让步，屈服于某人
give up 放弃 give up doing/sth
e.g. The mother gave in and bought a toy for her child.
Don’t give up. You still have chances to win in the match.
Para.3: 25. pass through through指从两边穿过或穿过空间内部, across指从一定范围的一边到另一边 “横跨”表面
26. be surprised to do *
Sentence focus:
1. It was my sister who first had the idea…
强调句型：It is / was+被强调部分+ that/ who+其余部分
注意：强调句中it不能更换，is/was与“其余部分”的时态一致，数不受被强调部分单复数的影响，被强调部分可以是除谓语以外的任何成分，被强调部分是人可用that/who，其它一律用that.被强调若是原句的主语，who/that之后的谓语动词在人称和数上与该主语一致。
e.g. I saw John in the street this morning.
---- It was I who/that saw John in the street this morning. （强调主语）
---- It was John that/ whom I saw in the street this morning. （强调宾语）
---- It was in the street that I saw John this morning. （强调地点状语）
---- It was this morning that I I saw John in the street. （强调时间状语）
2. She gave me a determined look---the kind that said…, the kind=the kind of look
the kind是a look的同位语,后面是that引导的定语从句, 其中say指 “指明,表明”
e.g The clock on the wall said a quarter to ten.
3. Once she has made up her mind, nothing can change it.=When she has made up hermind, nothing can change it.
once conj.一旦……(就), 一经……便……,相当于as soon as
e.g. Once you understand the rule, you will have no difficulty.
Translation: 钱一旦用完，我们该怎么办?
What will we do once the money is gone/ used up?
一旦做了，就要把事情做得最好.
Once you do it, you should do it best.
4. It becomes rapids as it passes through deep valleys, traveling across…traveling 是现在分词作伴随状语.
e.g. They came to the street, looking for the lost dog.
附：歌词
Kokomo
Aruba Jamaica ooo I wanna take you
Bermuda Bahama come on pretty mama
Key Largo Montego baby why don't we go Jamaica
Off the Florida Keys
There's a place called Kokomo
That's where you wanna go to get away from it all
Bodies in the sand
Tropical drink melting in your hand
We'll be falling in love
To the rhythm of a steel drum band
Down in Kokomo
Aruba Jamaica ooo I wanna take you
To Bermuda Bahama come on pretty mama
Key Largo, Montego baby why don't we go
Ooo I wanna take you down to Kokomo
We'll get there fast
And then we'll take it slow
That's where we wanna go
Way down to Kokomo
To Martinique, that Monserrat mystique
We'll put out to sea
And we'll perfect our chemistry
By and by we'll defy a little bit of gravity
Afternoon delight
Cocktails and moonlit nights
That dreamy look in your eye
Give me a tropical contact high
Way down in Kokomo
Aruba, Jamaica ooo I wanna take you
To Bermuda, Bahama come on pretty mama
Key Largo, Montego baby why don't we go
Ooo I wanna take you down to Kokomo
We'll get there fast
And then we'll take it slow
That's where we wanna go
Way down to Kokomo
Port Au Prince I wanna catch a glimpse
Everybody knows
A little place like Kokomo
Now if you wanna go
And get away from it all
Go down to Kokomo
Aruba, Jamaica ooo I wanna take you
To Bermuda, Bahama come on pretty mama
Key Largo, Montego baby why don't we go
Ooo I wanna take you down to Kokomo
We'll get there fast
And then we'll take it slow
That's where we wanna go
Way down to Kokomo
Aruba, Jamaica ooo I wanna take you
To Bermuda, Bahama come on pretty mama
Key Largo, Montego baby why don't we go
Ooo I wanna take you down to Kokomo
篇18：Unit 4 Earthquake (previewing exercises)(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Name_______
. Look up the following words, give the English meanings and find some beautiful sentences for them.
1. shake
2. burst
3. injure
4. rescue
5. shelter
6. destroy
7. organize
8. prepare
П. Try to translate the phrases into Chinese.
at an end come to sb’s rescue think little of bury oneself in
give out in honour of as usual be trapped under the ruins
dig out put up in ruins blow away be rescued from
Ш. Translate the following into Chinese.
1. The sound of planes could be heard outside Tangshan even when
no planes were in the sky.
2. It seemed that the world was at an end.
3. It was heard in Beijing, which is one hundred kilometers away.
4. A huge crack that was eight kilometers long and thirty meters
wide cut across houses, roads and canals.
5. All hope was not lost.
6. Workers built shelters for survivors whose homes had been destroyed.
Θ. Try to sum up :
Main idea of the passage
Topic sentence of 1st paragraph
Topic sentence of 2nd paragraph
Topic sentence of 3rd paragraph
Topic sentence of 4th paragraph
篇19：必修1 期中复习（词组）unit5(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Period 1
Pre-class task: 1.Copy and preview new vocabulary of Unit 5.
2. In groups, find out the information about six men :Nelson Mandela, William Tyndale, Norman Bethune, Sun Yat-sen, Gandhi, Neil Armstrong (nationality, career, important events, etc.)
Step 1 Word competition
Part 1: Each group get 5 words to read. Ten points for each.
Group A : hero, accept, period, equal, violence
Group B: peaceful, terror, leader, continue, position
Group C: prison, degree, reward, active, educated
Group D: advise, blanket, youth, principle, quality
Part 2: The quickest to read out the word correctly can get 20 points for his/ her group, but if the answer is wrong,
10 points will be lost. And the students in other groups have a chance to try.
invader, republic, nationalism, livelihood, cruelty, criminal, president, sincerely, Nelson Mandela, William Tyndale, Bible, Gandhi, Elias
Part 3: Ss in any group can participate it. The quickest who gives the correct Chinese/ English meaning of each phrase will get extra 10 points. The wrongs won’t lose points.
lose heart, in trouble, out of work, Youth League, blow up, as a matter of fact, put…in prison, come to power
Step 2 Warming up
1. Get Ss to name some great people.
2. T shows some great people’s pictures.
3. Get Ss to discuss what qualities a great person should have.
(smart, modest, unselfish, warm-hearted, confident, determined, active, honest, brave, persistent,
As a great person,
Should he/she help others?
Should he/she get on well with others?
Should he/she be willing to do public service?
Should he/she be active in society activities?
Should he/she never lose heart when he/she is in great trouble?
(As a great person, he/she should help others, get on well with others, be willing to do public service, be active in society activities and never lose heart when he/she is in great trouble and so on..)
4. Get Ss to decide “What kind of person are you? Do you have the qualities to be a great person?” by finishing the questionnaire on P33.
Step 3 Pre-reading
1. Get Ss to present some information about six men (Nelson Mandela, William Tyndale, Norman Bethune, Sun Yat-sen, Gandhi, Neil Armstrong)
2. Get Ss to discuss “Are they great people? Why?”
4. Go through the information about six men on P33-34.
Step 4 Talking (on P69)
Step 5 Homework
1. Review new words and expressions of Unit 5, and get ready for the dictation.
2. Do SB P35-36 Ex. 1. 2.
3. “中华一题”Section I
4. “English Weekly” Reading Comprehension A
Period 2
Step 1 Dictation (10 words)
Step 2 Homework checking
Step 3 Introduction and lead-in
Re-talk about Nelson Mandela.
Step 4 Reading comprehension
Read the text
1st time: Read the text while listening to the tape and get the general idea of the passage
Q: How many parts can we divide the text into? What’s the main idea of each part?
Part 1 (Para 1-2): The life of Elias before he met Nelson Mandela.
Part 2 (Para3-5): The change of Elias’ life after he met Nelson Mandela and what Mandela did.
2nd time: Read the text again carefully to obtain some details.
Finish Ex 1,2 on P35.
( Ex1: true 2,4
Ex2: 1940 He was born.
1946 He began school.
1948 He left school.
1952 Nelson Mandela opened his law firm.)
Step 5 Discussion
Pair work, discuss
1. How the ANC Youth League fights the government?
2. What can we learn from the text about Nelson Mandela?
(1. At first, the ANC Youth League fought against the government in a peaceful way. But when they failed, they began to use violence.
(2. From the text, we can learn from Mandela the qualities of bravery, persistence, kindness and determination.)
Step 6 Extensive reading
Get Ss to learn more about Nelson Mandela.
1st time: Read the text while listening to the tape.
2nd time: Read the text again carefully to obtain some details.
1) Finish Ex on P38 ( D D B A)
2) Answer the questions: When did Elias lose his job? ( In 1973)
Does Elias like his present work? (Yes. Now at 51 I am proud to…)
Step 7 Homework
1. Read “ Notes to the text” for U5 ( P84-86)
2. Do WB P70 Ex. 1
3. Do SB P37 Ex. 1. 2.
4. “English Weekly” Reading Comprehension B
5. Find out the phrases and expressions according to the Chinese T gives.
Period 3
Step 1 Homework checking
Step 2 Language points
1. fight
1)vt. 和…战斗, 和…打
eg. English fought Germany.
vi. 作战，战斗
*fight for… 为…而战斗
eg. He told the workers to fight for their rights.
*fight against/with… 为反对…而斗争, 和…作斗争
eg. You will have to fight against/with difficulties.
England fought against/with Germany in the war of 1941-1948.
*fight with… 和…一起作战
eg. They fought with the Italians in the last war.
2. advise v.
*advise sb on sth 就…给某人出主意
eg. I have advised you on that subject.
The teacher advised me on how to learn English.
*advise sb to do sth 建议某人干…
eg. The teacher advises me to practise more spoken English.
*advise that sb (should) do sth
eg. I advise that you (should) not eat this kind of fruit.
advice n.[u]
a piece of advice
give sb advice on… 关于….给某人建议
eg. In one of his books, Marx gave some advice on how to learn English.
3. prison
*be in prison 坐牢
be in the prison 在监狱里，可能坐牢，可能工作
eg. He told me that he had been in prison for three years.
*put sb in prison 把…投入监狱
The robber has been put in prison.
*sb be kept/held prisoner 被囚禁
4. accept 接受，指的是主观上接受了
receive 收到，指客观上收到，不一定接受
eg. I received his invitation, but I didn’t accept it.
5. stop…(from) doing sth 阻止...做某事
eg. You must stop him (from) telling his father.
I really want to stop you (from) smoking.
6. educated adj. 受过教育的，有教养的
better educated 是well educated的比较级
7. be sentenced to sth 被判刑
eg. He was sentenced to 3 years in prison.他被判3年监禁.
He was sentenced to death. 他被判死刑.
Step 3 Sentence focus:
1. The school where I had studied only two years was three kilometers away.
be…away 有…远， 可以指距离， 也可以指时间
eg. The new house is about three miles away.
The exams are still three weeks away.
2. After trying hard, I got a job in a gold mine.
after doing 介词短语作状语用，表示时间。*其逻辑主语要与主句主语一致
eg. After getting up, he always drinks a glass of water.
After his mother went out, he began to watch TV. (T)
After going out, he began to watch TV. (F)
3. The last thirty years have seen the greatest number of laws stopping our rights and progress
see在此句意为见证、目睹；为某事发生之时，主语常为时间
eg. Yesterday saw a terrible car accident in front of our school.
4. The parts of town where they lived were places decided by white people.
主句是The parts of town were places. 定语从句是where they lived
decided by white people 是过去分词作定语，相当于which is decided by white people, 修饰places
5. We were put in a position in which we had either to accept we were less important, or fight the Government.
either…or… 或者…或者…
less + adj./adv.(原级) + than 是形容词（副词）比较级的一种，表示前者不及后者。
此句中，less important是less important than the White 的省略结构
eg. In his life, he has always tried to help those who are less fortunate than he.
6. only then did we decide to answer violence with violence. 只有在这时，我们才决定用暴力反抗暴力。
这是一个倒装句。结构：Only + 状语 + 部分倒装
状语：由副词，介词短语或状语从句构成
*部分倒装用一般疑问句的语序
eg. Only yesterday did his father tell him the truth.
Only by shouting was he able to make people hear him.
Only when his father came back did he go to bed.
*only引导的词不是状语不用倒装
eg. Only he can work out this problem.
7. But I was happy to help because I knew it was to realize our dream of making black and white people equal.
was to do 在此处意为注定将会…
eg. You were to regret your decision later.
8．I felt bad the first time I talked to a group. 第一次给旅行团作讲解时，我的心情很不好。
the first time 起连词的作用，引导时间状语从句
eg. The first time I met him, I thought him nice.
9. We read books under our blankets and used anything we could find to make candles to see the words.
we could find 是定语从句，修饰anything
to make candles及to see the words 是目的状语
10．As they were not cleverer than me, but did pass their exams.
did pass 是强调结构，强调谓语动词时，在动词原形前do / does / did
eg. I do hope you have a nice trip.
He does speak English well.
Step 4 Homework
1. Recite paragraph of the text
2. Do WB P71 Ex 2 Translation (on Ex book)
3. “English Weekly” Multiple choice ,Reading Comprehension C & Cloze test
4. Read P92
Period 4
Step 1 Homework checking
Step 2 Grammar
The Attributive Clause (II)---由关系副词when, where, why引导的定语从句
Basic Rules:
1. 关系副词when在从句中作时间状语
eg. I still remember the day when I first met you.
2. 关系副词where在从句中作地点状语
eg. This shop is the place where I first met you.
3. 关系副词why在从句中作原因状语(先行词只有reason一词)
eg. The reason why he was late was that he missed his train.
4. how不能用作关系副词, 也不能引导定语从句.
This is the way how he did it. (F)
This isthe way (that/ in which ) he did it. (T)
* “English Weekly” when, where, why引导定语从句四注意
Step 3 Practice
Step 4. Homework
1. Do WB P71 Ex 1,2 (on Ex book)
2. Finish “English Weekly”
篇20：Unit 4 Earthquake ( a quiz for words and reading)(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Name ________
1. Words and Phrases:
摇动;颤抖;v.n. 井n.
裂缝;开裂 n.v. 有臭味的ad.
池塘; n. 爆裂;爆发vi. n.
运河;水道; n. 蒸汽;水汽;n.
污垢;泥土; n. 废墟;毁灭;n.
损害;伤害; v. 幸存者;生还者;n.
破坏;毁坏; vt. 砖块;n.
水坝;堰堤; n. 无用的;ad.
钢n. 震惊;震动;v. n.
援救;营救; n.v. 电;电学;n.
灾难;灾祸; n. 陆军;军队;n.
组织; v. 埋葬;掩埋;vt.
百分比;n 裁判员;法官;n.
尊敬;荣誉;v.n. 准备; 预备;vt.
自然灾害 phr. 救援人员phr.
90% phr. 死难者phr.
2. Complete the following according the reading:
But how could the survivors believe it was natural? Everywhere they looked nearly everything was _______ . Bricks ______ the ground like red autumn leaves. No wind, however, could blow them ______. The railway tracks were now _______ pieces of steel. Tens of thousands of cows would never give milk again. Half a million pigs and millions of chickens had died. Sand now ______ the well instead of water. People were ____ Then , another big quake shook Tangshan. Some _______ workers and doctors were trapped under the ________ . More buildings fell down. Water, food, and __________ were hard to get. People began to wonder how long the _______ would last. All hope was ____ lost. The soldiers arrived. The army _________ teams to __________ those who were trapped and to _______ the dead. To the north of the city, most of the 10,000 miners were ________ from the coal ________. Workers built _________ for _________ whose homes had been destroyed. Slowly, the city began to breathe again.
